<<

The tectonic evolution and geochemistry of the Lewisian Complex of North Harris

by

Stephen Richard Soldin

A thesis submitted for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the University of London

Geology Department Imperial College of Science and Technology London SW7

June l97$ Abstract

The Lewisian Complex of North Harris is composed of homogeneous acid derived from an early Scourian Complex which are intruded by basic and ultrabasic rocks of the Scourie Dyke Suite the whole being affected by Laxfordian deformation and metamorphism, events which dominate the observed history of the region. While four phases of Laxfordian deformation are seen only two (F2 and F3) are of major importance the former producing the predominant NW-SE trend of the gneissic banding, large scale fold structures in the Scourie Dykes and numerous minor structures throughout the region; and the latter being intimately associated with the late Laxfordian phase of and production which is concentrated in the south and west of the area. Regional variations in Laxfordian strain can be suggested on the basis of the variable preservation of igneous features in the Scourie Dykes. The predominantly acid gneisses, although litholog- ically simple show gross variations in their mineralogy that can be mapped out and correlated with regional geo- chemical trends defined by trend surface analysis, such correlation leading to the suggestion that early litholo- gital variations of the complex are retained. Other petrological and geochemical features show the gneisses to be typical of facies gneisses seen throughout the Lewisian; their characters do not suggest that they are retrogressed granulites. To the south and west a belt of granitic rocks is developed in which are produced by 'in situ' metasomatism and recrystallisation of the host gneisses. The area of granitic rocks correlates with a region of relatively high volatile contents of the gneisses, a during feature which is taken as evidence of high PH2O metamorphism. The gneisses of these areas are also texturally distinct from those elsewhere and provide further evidence of the concentration of late Laxfordian deformation in areas of granite production. The basic and ultrabasic rocks of the complex are predominantly derived by the deformation and metamorphism of Scourie Dykes. In regions marked by the high volatile contents of the gneisses simple predominate while elsewhere clinopyroxene amphibolites are most common. On petrological and geochemical grounds the rocks may be divided into an uncommon suite of basic and ultrabasic noritic rocks, and basic (clinopyroxene- plagioclase) rocks which are the precursors of the majority of the amphibolites. Mineral chemistry of these rocks is used to provide further evidence of the preservation of igneous assemblages in some rocks, to study cryptic chemical variations in a layered ultrabasic complex at Maaruig, and to determine the PIT conditions of the amphibolite facies metamorphism to which the area was subjected. PIT estimates so obtained indicate a temperature of some 7500C at 6-7 kb. To my parents Acknowledgements

I would like to acknowledge the supervision of my work by Professor who, besides such supervision and the reading and correcting of long and sometimes 'ill-written' manuscripts also showed interest in the personal problems which inevitably occur during a four year period of research. Such kindness and consideration from one's supervisor seems rare and I thank her for both. For the XRF work I am indebted to Geoff Sullen without whose help the analytical work could not have been carried out; to Peter Watkins for his analyses of iron and sodium in my many samples; and to Robin Parker for help with the necessary computing techniques. I thank Paul Suddaby for assistance with the use of the micro-probe and Malcolm Frost for the many happy hours of work his computer programmes gave me, and for the light-hearted antagonism which assisted their passing. To my fellow postgraduate students, without whom the period of my research would have indeed been desolate, I particularly thank Rob Horsley and Dave Savage for discussions, John Wolff for being a friend In my need and Kate for her company and 'coercion' to help me put pen to paper and fingers to typewriter keys during the latter period of writing-up.

To my parents, to whom this thesis is dedicated, words are insufficient thanks for their constant encouragement and, lately, financial assistance...

Finally I acknowledge a grant from the Natural Environment Research Council. Contents

List of figures List of tables

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Chapter 2 Structural History 21 Chapter 3 The gneisses: petrology and geochemistry 67 Chapter 4 The basic and ultrabasic rocks of the complex 139 Chapter 5 Mineral chemistry of the basic and ultrabaslc rocks - 225 Chapter 6 Conclusions 270

Bibliography 2$3 Appendices 295

Full contents lists are given at the beginning of each chapter. List of figures

Fig: PP 1.1 Location+ map of North Harris 4 l.lb Outline map of North Harris showing the chief topographic features referred to in the text 5 1.2 The geology of Lewis and North Harris 10 1.3 Schematic map of parts of the southern islands Outer 14 2.1 Lewisian types 26 2.2 Possible F1 foliations in basic bands and lenses 29 2.3 trend map- 31 2.4 The distribution of basic and ultrabasic rocks 32 2.5 Schematic representation of the possible sequence of events during F2 deformation 34 2.6 F2 fold styles (a and b) 36 2.7 Interference structure in a thin basic layer, Gullaval Glas 37 2.8 Boudin types (a and b) 38 2,9 Diagram indicating the forms of boudinage with varying competence contrast 39 2,10 Mineral fabrics in amphibolites (a and b) 43 2.11 Examples of 'anomalous' foliations in basic layers 45 2.12 Zones of variable Laxfordian strain 48 2.13 F3 fold styles, fabrics and interference structures (3 pages) 51 2.14 Examples of discordances between amphibolite bands and the gneissic fabrics 56 2.15 F2 fold in amphibolite 58 2.16 Unusual F2 folds 59 2.17 Folded contained within amphibolite layers 61 2.18 Small auartz vein cutting and offsetting an amphibolite band in grey gneiss 63 2,19 Late-stage features of tectonic activity 64 3.1 The distribution of granitic rocks and pegmatites 73 3.2 Distribution of gneiss types 74 3.4 A1 4 v, (Na + K) plot of hornblende compositions 78 3.5 Possible biotite-hornblende reactions 79 Fig: pp 3.6 Garnet in garnet-gneiss, Bunaveneader 82 3.7 Textural features in quartz grains (a,b,c) 84 3.8 Distribution of gneissose and other textural types 86 3.9 Relationship of K20 and Rb to Si02 in North Harris gneisses and granites 92 3.10 Scheme of K/Rb ratios according to Shaw (1968) 93 3.11 K/Rb plot for North Harris gneisses and granites 93 3.12 Compilation diagram showing the K/Rb ratios of gneisses and granites for North Harris..., the Uig Hills... and typical Lewisian granulites 94 3.13 AFM diagram, North Harris gneisses and granites 96 ._ 3.14 CKN diagram, ditto 97 3.15 Normative feldspar diagram, ditto 98 3.16 Variation diagrams for North Harris gneisses and granites (3 pages) 101 3.17 Variation diagrams for gneisses and granites from the Uig Hills 104 3.18 Relationships of various element ratios to modal hornblende, biotite and feldspar in gneisses 108 3.19 Comparison of North Harris gneisses and granites with granulite facies gneisses of and (2 pages) 112 3.20 Concept of trend illustrated in two dimensions 115 3.21 Sample localities for use in trend surfaces 119, 3.22 Trend surface of selected. elements (4 pages) 120 3.23 Quartz-Ab-Or diagram, North Harris gneisses and granites 130 3.24 Normative feldspar diagram, ditto 131 3.25 Variation between K20, CaO, Na20, Rb, Sr and Ba in the granitic rocks of North Harris 132 3.26 Contoured distribution of volatile contents in the gneisses 134 4.1 General distribution of the basic rocks 143 4.2 Garnet being pseudomorphed by pyroxene- plagioclase aggregates, Rhenigadale 148 4.3 Layering in amphibolites 149 4.4 Hornblende-granulite (phototmicrograph) 151 4.5 Exsolved iron oxide in deformed hornblende 151 Fig: PP 4.6 Features of the noritic orthopyroxenes 155 4.7 Corona structures and mineral intergrowths in the noritic rocks 157 4.8 Clouded, twinned interstitial plagioclase from UB rocks at the top of the Maaruig series 162 4.9 Features of the UB rocks south of Tarbert 163 4.10 General form, lithology and mineralogy of the ultrabasic lens south of Tarbert 164 4.11 AFM diagram of the North Harris rocks 174 4.12 Alkali-silica diagram 175 4.13 The basalt tetrahedron 176 4.14 TiO2-K20-P205 discrimination diagram 178 4.15 Ti-Zr-Sr discrimination diagram 178 4.16 Variation diagrams for the North Harris basic and ultrabasic rocks (4 pages) 180 4.17 Sketch map of the noritic and associated rocks at Ardvourlie 186 4.18 Mafic pod within noritic rocks, Ardvourlie 187 4.19 Variations in whole rock chemistry within the noritic rocks, and between them and the marginal amphibolites 190 4.20 Sequence of rock types in the Maauig complex 192 4.21 Variations in mineral chemistry in the Maaruig ultrabasic rocks (2 pages) 194 4.22 Variations in whole rock chemistry of the Maaruig ultrabasic rocks (2 pages) 197 4.23 Map showing the suggested structure of the Maaruig UB complex 199 4.24 Graphs of element ratios drawn according to the methods of Pearce (4 pages) 205 4.25 Schematic representation of whole rock and mineral ratios in the Maaruig UBs 210 4.26 Schematic representation of whole rock and mineral ratios in the noritic rocks 211 4.27 Schematic representation of whole rock and mineral ratios in the amphibolites 213 4.28 Stability fields of tholeiitic assemblages 220 4.29 Tholeiitic assemblages at 1100°C and varying pressures 220 Fig; pp 5.1 Plot of end member compositions of pyroxenes and olivines 230 5.2 Relationship between MnO and Fo content in olivines 231 5.3 Olivine-opxn relationships in Maaruig UB and Tarbert UB rocks 231 5.4 Division of orthopyroxenes into metamorphic and igneous types on the basis of their composition 233 5.5 Relationship between Fe/Mg ratios of the pyroxenes and their host rocks 235 5.6 Relationships between Fs content and composition in clinopyroxenes (2 pages) 237' 5.7 Garnet compositions plotted in terms of their almandine-pyrope-grossular end members 240 5.8 Relationship between Fe/Mg ratios of garnets and amphiboles and their host rocks 241 5.9 Classification schemes for amphiboles 243 5.10 Element variations in amphiboles 246 5.11 Element variations in chromates 248 5.12 Element variations in ilmenites 251 5.13 Fe/Mg distribution in ferromagnesian minerals 252 .5.14 Element distributions between amphiboles and other ferromagnesian phases 252a 5.15 Element distributions between amphiboles and • plagioclase 256 5.16 P-T determination using cpxn-opxn 262 5.17 P-T determination using garnet-cpxn .263 5.18 Estimate of temperature using ilmenite-pyxns 265 5.19 Estimate of temperature 6using garnet-cpxn 265 5.20 Relationship between AI content of amphiboles and pressure 266 6.1 P/T fields for the metamorphic assemblages in Scourie Dykes of various regions 278a List.of tables

Table: pp 1.1 Structural correlations in the 15 1.2 Summary table of available age dates, Outer Hebrides ;16 2.1 Features of the Lewisian Complex of Lewis in relation to variations in Laxfordian strain 46 3. 1 Composition of hornblendek, plagioclase and biotite from three gneiss samples 77 3.2 Average compositions of some common crustal rocks 90 3.3 Comparison between biotite gneisses and hornblende-biotite gneisses from North Harris 90a 3.4 Composition of subsidiary gneiss types 90b 3.5 Interelement correlations in hornblende and biotite gneisses 107 3.6 Comparison between the gneisses of North Harris and the Uig Hills 109a 3.7 Average compositions of amphibolite facies gneisses 110 3.8 Average compositions of granitic rocks, from the Uig Hills 128 4.1 Averaged major and trace element analyses of the North Harris basic and ultrabasic rocks 168 4.2 Comparison of Scourie Dyke rocks of North Harris and elsewhere in the Lewisian 170 4.3 Composition of tholeiitic rocks of various provinces ' 171 5.1 Olivine compositions 229 5.2 Orthopyroxene compositions 229 5.3 Clinopyroxene compositions: hornblende- granulites and amphibolites 236 5.4 Garnet compositions 236 5.5 Amphibole compositions 244 5.6 Plagiocalse compositions 244 5.7 Ilmenite compositions 250 5.8 Summary of P/T estimates and their results 268 6.1 Comparative table of tectono-metamorphic events in North Harris, western Harris and Lewis 282 Chapter 1

Introduction

'No one but a blockhead ever wrote, except for money' Dr. Johnson

L

1 Chapter 1

Contents

1.1 The geography of North Harris 3 1.2 The Lewisian Complex- introduction 3 1.3 The Lewisian Complex of the Outer Hebrides 8 1.4 The geology of North Harris- introduction 17 1.5 Geochemistry: aims and results 18 1.6 Format of the thesis 19 Chapter 1

The work recorded in this thesis primarily involves a study of the petrology and geochemistry of the 'Grey Gneisses' and the basic and ultrabasic rocks of the Scourie Dyke suite which intrude them. Such a study is based on four months field work in which a general tectonic scheme was established and samples collected prior to extensive mineralogical and analytical work in London. In all aspects the work is a regional study- for example the geochemical data being used to establish gross regional variations in chemistry in the gneiss complex (see Chapter 3).

1.1 The geography of North Harris

The area of east North Harris (Fig:1.1) covers some 110 square kilometres and contains much excellent exposure, interspersed with lochs and peat bogs in which exposure is very poor. Such irregularity of exposure serves to create problems when sampling for geochemical purposes. Although of only moderate relief the area is one of the most rugged regions of the Outer Hebrides and includes the highest peak, Clisham (800m). Exposure on the flanks of the hills is often good due to glaciation whereas valleys are invariably filled with peat and the peaks of the hills frost shattered and poorly exposed. Glacial crags, often quite precipitous, have been developed on both north-facing slopes and in the head walls of corries but the area remains quite accesible if the route is care- fully chosen. Perhaps Macculloch's view (1819) of North Harris as a region " where unsurmountable rocks and impassable bogs alternately claim the mastery" is of a somewhat exaggerated style but it more than adequately conveys ones first impressions of the area!

1.2 The Lewisian Complex- introduction

While general accounts of the Lewisian Complex abound in various publications and papers I feel that some intro- duction to it is called for, if only to define the terms 3 7°W

N

57°55'N

c'O

BARRA

Fig:1.1 Location map of North Harris (stippled).

4 / Vj.ada\e •Iia Vigadalo s Ardvourlie Castle

Mullach an Lenga • ` s\ e

Clett Ard Toinnaval Mulla—fo—dheas A A Clisham O A Gormul i Maaruig s

s Maaruig •Tarsaval

■ Bu:.aveneader Straiaval A le River s&rdhasig ;AToddun

A Gullaval Glas Rhenigadze s

• 4 a.

m TARBMT

(Mapped by Thamdruo: work unpublished)

Fig:1.1b Outline map of North Harris showing the chief topographic features referred to in the text.

5 used in the rest of this work. The discussion will, however, be brief. The Lewisian Complex includes the banded gneisses, granites, metaigneous and metasedimentary rocks that form the in the north-west Highlands of . The whole is characterised by having undergone several phases of metamorphism and deformation. Peach, et al studying the mainland Lewisian (1907) recognised that the complex was markedly heterogeneous and of complex history. It was only with the work of Sutton and Watson (1951) that the subdivision into a Scourian Complex and later Laxfordian Complex was suggested, a division based on the recognition of a swarm of basic rocks (the Scourie Dykes) intruded after the Scourian events and deformed and metamorphosed by the later Laxfordian events. This simple, but nonetheless crucial subdivision has remained with little modification ever since. The Scourian marks the period during which much of the Lewisian Complex was produced for little material- in the form of sedimentary or volcanic series- seems to have been added to it since that time. The original nature of the complex is, however, an enigma. It is possible that Scourian events affected an even older gneissic basement, or possibly a basement-cover sequence. Equally problematical is the question of how much of the present gneiss complex was derived from sedimentary and volcanic succesi.ons and how much from deep-seated plutonic rocks; certainly, metasedimentary relicts remain but their original extent is unknown. Also within the the complex are basic and ultrabasic rocks some of them showing evidence of layering, serpentinites, and associated metasedimentary rocks all deformed and meta- morphosed and forming units up to a few hundred metres in thickness and several kilometres in length. Further subdivision of the Scourian event has inevit- ably been suggested. The major metamorphic event of the period (at some 2800my), termed the Badcallian by Park (1970), represents the most widespread metamorphism producing granulite facies gneisses and high grade assemblages in metasediments towards the north and amphi- boiite facies assemblages to the south. Later Scourian

6 events included the production of minor intrusions, pegmatites and metasediments (eg. the Loch Maree Series). Effects of late Scourian deformation are irregularly developed. For example, Evans et al (1974) proposed the 'inverian' episode to explain a zone of local retrogression and deformation of Badcallian rocks and structures in the Lochinver region.

All structures and rocks of Scourian age are cut by the intrusive basic rocks of the Scourie Dyke Suite. These intrusions are regarded as dykes emplaced in a more or less single swarm and range from simple tholeiitic intrusions to peridotites, norites and other rock types. Sutton and Watson (1951) regarded them as being emplaced into relatively stable and brittle crust, but other authors (eg. O'Hara, 1961; Park and Cressweil, 1972) have suggested they were intruded into hot and even plastic rocks. It seems likely that the dykes were emplaced over a consid- erable period of time and both conditions of intrusion could possibly be satisfied from region to region. The subsequent deformation and metamorphism of the Scourie Dykes has led to the recognition of a distinction between the earlier Scourian and later Laxfordian episodes. Areas in which the dykes are not substantially affected are regarded as portions of the Scourian Complex set within the reworked Laxfordian Complex. Such massifs occur on all scales and have been the subject of much further study.

The Laxfordian episode involved extensive metamorph- ism and deformation of the early members of the complex, remobilisation of parts of which gave rise to local development of granites and migmatites in the later Laxfordian. Subdivision of the Laxfordian events have been suggested based on metamorphic or structural criteria but it may in general terms be regarded as a period of predominant amphibolite facies metamorphism in association with several phases of deformation, with reworking of the early complex in ail areas other than the relict Scourian massifs mentioned above. Locally the Laxfordian episode culminated in the production of granitic rocks.

7 1.3 The Lewisian Complex of the Outer Hebrides

The Outer Hebrides, se.perated from the mainland by , are composed almost entirely of rocks of the Lewisian Complex whose history is broadly similar tõ that of the mainland. What follows is a brief account of some of the major, regional features, an account based on previous research in the Outer Isles.

Early visitors to the Outer Isles in the 19th century included Macculloch, Murchison, Geikie and Heddle. Macculloch (1819) refers to the Hebrides as a "country of gneiss" and his remarks concerned both Harris, where he recorded "limestone" and other such rock types, and Lewis. He was the first to .record the presence of "argillaceous schists" on the east of the island, later to be recognised as crushed rocks in the Outer Isles Thrust. Murchison and Geikie (1861) record the dominant NW-SE strike of the gneiss foliation, several occur- ences of limestone and a granite at Dalbeg, Lewis. Heddle (1878) referred to Harris as "... almost entirely composed of hornblende gneiss... It is certainly the oldest of all known rocks in Scotland." Much of his record concerns the lithologies of the South Harris Complex. Peach and Horne (1913,1930) visited the islands with a view to comparing them with the Lewisian of the Scottish mainland. They described the gneisses- biotite) biotite-hornblende and hornblende gneisses- and later acid rocks and commented on the general absence of quartzo-pyroxene gneiss, the existence of some flaggy granulites and the occurence of crushed rocks in east- ern Lewis. Dougal (1928) noted that the Uig Hills consisted of red microcline granite and recorded the presence of a belt of crushed rocks from to Lewis and the occur- ence of several masses of basic rock- including that at Maaruig in North Harris (see Chpt.4).

The single most important contribution to the geology of the Outer Hebrides was that of Jehu and Craig who studied the islands from Barra to Ness publishing their 8 work in five papers from 1923 to 1934. Their account of North Harris was published in 1934 and included a map of (Fig:1.2) on a scale of 1cm. to 1 mile and in which many of the important features described in this work are recorded for the first time. In their North Harris paper they describe basic pods and lenses as the earliest portions of the complex, regarding the more leucocratic gneisses as having intruded them at a later stage. The extreme uniformity of the biotite gneisses is noted. Three paragneiss occurences are shown in east North Harris and some basic and ultra- basic rock types are described in detail. The extent of granites and pegmatites in west North Harris and the Uig Hills is indicated as is that of the belt of crushed rocks on the eatern side of the island.

Dearnley (1962) was the first to correlate events in the history of the Lewisian of the Outer Hebrides with those of the Scottish mainland. He recognised a suite of basic intrusions similar to the Scourie Dykes and hence introduced the Scourian-Laxfordian concept to the Outer Isles. In these basic rocks he saw evidence - for an early Laxfordian granulite facies metamorphism and later retrogression to amphibolite facies, a view not shared by this author (Chpt.4). He suggested the existence of three broad structural zones- a central zone between South and the Sound of Harris exhibiting dominantly Scourian features and correlated directly to the Scourian block on the mainland after a displacement of some 70 miles along a postulated Minch fault, and northern and southern zones with predomin- antly Laxfordian features. In a second paper, on the South Harris complex, Dearnley (1963) described it's general lithology and structure and established the chemistry of several of it's components. For the igneous rocks he suggested a sequence of ultrabasics---tonalite all derived from an original tholeiitic magma by differentiation, and regarded the complex as a possible plutonic centre related to the ultrabasic and basic intrusions of the Scourie Dykes in the Lewisian Complex.

9

He recognised relict textures and mineral assemblages dating from a "pre-Laxfordian metamorphism and folding" in rocks which he considered to precede the igneous complex. Much work has since been carried out on the complex- much of it of a geochemical nature- and the complex has come to be regarded as Scourian in age and subjected to several metamorphic and tectonic episodes.

The granite-migmatite.complex of South Harris and west North Harris was studied by Myers (1968,1971a) who established the existence of a region within this complex in which migmatisation had taken place in Scourian times although it is the later Laxfordian events whose effects now predominate (see Table 1.1). He established sequences of pegmatite and granite prod- uction, described the development of 'in situ' granitic units and the relationship between granite formation and the tectonic development of the complex. He also established the form of the complex as a broad dome of migmatisation, roofed by country rock gneisses. In general the sequences and structures Myers records are duplicated in east North Harris but on a somewhat smaller scale.with only locallised granite development (Chpt.3). The extension of the complex into the (Jig Hills is being studied by geologists of the Institute of, Geological Sciences who are also carrying out geochem- ical work on the granitic, gneissic and basic rocks of the region, data which has been made available to me by Drs.D.Fettes and D.Smith, and which I gratefully acknowledge. Myers (1970) also suggested a scheme for the sub- division of the gneisses based on the form and compos- ition of the gneissic banding. This scheme is described and discussed in chapters 2 and 3.

The basic and ultrabasic rocks of the Scourie Dyke Suite have been studied by a variety of researchers. As stated above Dearnley (1962) first recognised the basic rocks as being Scourie Dykes similar to those of

11 the mainland. In subsequent papers (1968,1973) he describes features of deformed dykes and presents geo- chemical data of typical examples. Watson (1968) working on the metadolerites of in west Lewis obtained an E-W trend as the original orientation of the dykes, a trend which is therefore similar to that characteristic of dykes of the mainland. Myers (1968, 1971) suggested that zones of abundant dyke fragments could be interpreted in relation to large Laxfordian folds oriented on NW-SE lines, such zones providing the only evidence of large scale Laxfordian structures in west North Harris. Using such a distribution he concl- uded that the original orientation of the intrusions was on NE-SW lines, an orientation somewhat at variance with that of the undisturbed dykes of the mainland. All such features are duplicated in east North Harris (Chpt.2) and lead to a similar conclusion; it would therefore seem that in the deformed Scourie Dykes of North Harris in general there is evidence of a set of intrusions whose original orientation was somewhat different to those of the mainland. Further to this conclusion is the division of the Scourie Dykes of east North Harris into two sets of intrusions on petrological and geochemical grounds.

Davies, et al (1975) in their discussion of the Lewisian of northern Lewis describe areas of relatively low Laxfordian reworking, a conclusion partly based on the preservation of igneous features and intrusive contacts in the Scourie Dykes. They also describe structural features of the gneisses which give credence to their suggestions (see Chpt.2). Other regions of low Laxfordian deformation relating to various structures in the Lewisian of the Southern Isles were noted by Coward, Francis and Graham (all 1969) in PhD theses. Low deformation areas are recorded while elsewhere intense Laxfordian deformation- in four phases- associated with amphibolite facies metamorphism and local late Laxfordian granite formation is much in evidence. These features were discussed again by Coward et al (1970) and Coward (1973a) in which the structure of the Southern

12 Isles was shown to incorporate large-scale antiforms seperated by pinched synforms (fig:l.3) related to viscosity contrasts between the drier and thus more viscous rocks of the east- where pre-Laxfordian structures and mineral assemblages are preserved, metasedimentary relicts are rare and pyroxene gneisses common- and wetter, less viscous rocks of the west- where metasediments are common, early features rarely preserved and the gneisses exhibit amphibolite facies assemblages. In the areas of low Laxfordian strain recorded on the eastern side of Scourian features are retained (Coward, 1973b). These areas occupy rounded antiforms and are only substantially deformed by the F3 phase of Laxfordian deformation. Such large scale structures and areas in which Scourian features are preserved are not seen in east North Harris and the sequence of structural events is somewhat different (Table 1.1).

Finally, metasedimentary rocks are described in various areas by Coward et al (1969), Watson (1969) and Davies et al (1975). The former distinguish between calcareous, psammitic, pelitic and semi-pelitic meta- sediments, types which include within them both biotite and hornblende gneisses of "uncertain affinities". Little evidence of metasediments exists in east North Harris.

Thus far nothing has been said of the ages of the events outlined above. Table 1.2 (based mainly on Dickinson, 1974) lists the ages obtained in the Outer Hebrides using a variety of lithologies and methods. Many of the pegmatites exhibit a late Laxfordian age, as do the gneisses but some Scourian pegmatites are included. The Grey Gneisses generally yield a Laxfordian age3Scourian zircon and lead-lead dates have been obtained, giving further evidence of an early complex.

13

s a, roRe ZONE

Bv $Nravt D fl~ Roam car 5501'0 sYRF~cE

AEY If 5mnarte S~S@L1151 sersaartA< EvE Apptot/male trat um tMVS? - Snena 514cag t?lala I) base sotlnag flats 10t0*55 9etmryn 1(555 oras In5a5et0rt Lce clog the arm of the maJor FJ bt^s 915r6yor4,.dn.rtny C''°°' blc Lmes $teeyy mpprng 1 Une a p5195 ola , mnen 0* South Uot ~,~9ourcery ~PoTw~ of Iraq w twntr•t row hnrte ri srsSCOn( . eUotCf Detotta Sc it Cyr C_^.C;^/_s COO oiOflK,is 0 009 1101 M'srst) laqo Cpf0mn0/pn (sat 00000) Lb'hlontll' 015t0*007105551 { 4915550$ (05*5 Areos ohne OyMi m 000001 in 055* p055,155 antl u5515 555tfln

afRA SYNFORMAL ZAVE ~ C mes 8 0 u RAow055

8A14%4

F 1g : 1 . 3 Schematic map of parts of the southern islands, Outer Hebrides illustrating the arrangement of Laxfordian F3 antiforms and synforms in relation to other tectonic and metamorphic features. (From Coward, et at, 1970). GENERAL HISTORY SOUTiEi ISLES Sib and West NORTH HARRIS LEWIS NORTH HARRIS Local development of pegs Both local and large- Small scale development Large scale development of F3 structures, small

io and granites with their ks scale development with only. granites and pegmatites. scale; flat-lying it oo n Minor granites associated F3 structures. r associated structures. F4 structures present F3 structures are main folds.

Gra phase of the regions. and pegs'. seen chiefly in west.

Large scale folds in the F3 very large folds with Major folds seen in the F2 structures are F2 structures dominate, , N Sthn. Isles evidenced by pinched synforms (due to gneisses of South Harris predominant, small, widespread and on all scales, largest outlined m the gneisses; suggested contrast between 'dry'roaks and suggested by the F1 structures (Lax') m elsewhere by patterns of in east and'wet'in west) Scourie Dykes in W.Harris identified, by gneisses and Scourie N ā Scourie Dyke fragments.agments. F These era the largest of Dyke fragments. Areas of 2 only divided in south DIA Suggested Scourian set in F1 the F2 structures, which varying Laxfordian strain a north and south reworked are otherwise small and are suggested. F1 folds AXFOR L ā Laxfordian complex. widespread, seen but uncommon, small. Amphibolite facies with Early complex not well Little published. Early 8mphibolite facies metamorphism throughout the

ic Laxfordian, culminating in a period of granite granites, etc at it's h preserved. Suggested two complex preserved in east des

rp o and pegmatite production (onvarious scales). Two- climax. Again two-phase , o metamorphic phases in with amphibolite met'ism m is phase metamorphism discounted, 'granulites metism met'ism discounted. Late ta ep Laxfordian (granulite in reworked complex of

Me early; amphibolite later) west, suggested as due to local 'hot-spots'. retrogression. Recognition of Scourie Seen throughout the area. Not recognised i the 5th Scourie dykes of Scourie Dykes very, abund-;.

Dykes led to similarity Mineralogy suggested to be Harris complex, but every- various types seen, ant, everywhere deformed.

ta. of events with mainland associated with style of where else. Various types Their degree of def- by F2, but some with KES e with Soourian/Laxfordian deformation, and assemblages. Outline ormation is used to relict features in areas episodes, etc. Variety of Suggested E-W trends, large folds in W.Harris. indicate areas of low of 'low' Lax' strain. tion, E DY I

bu 'dyke types a]o similar. Basic and ultrabasic types. - Basic and ultrabasic Laxfordian strain. various types originally, i UR

tr Basic and ultrabasic types rocks present. Original Original H-N trend (UB, basic and noritic). SCO is Original NESW trend. D Original trend ENE-ENE. NE-SWtrend suggested. suggested. Scourian structures No Scourian structures Occasional areas in which Such areas of low Lax' Some suggested Scourian d can be suggested apart ian Laxfordian strain was low deformation are seen in structures in the gneiss in areas of low Lax' show preserved Scourian the east; no large early of both areas (F1 phase). strain- folds and from the early gneissic eserve

Scour features; uncommon, Also in Sth.Harris. lineations. foliation. Pr structures seen. Metasediments, metaigneous Metaseds' and igneous Relicts of sed' and other Relict sed' and other Isolated metaigneous

relicts locally preserved- rocks preserved in the rocks widespread. Chief rocks. Some evidence rocks, some sed' (?)

tures particularly in the large 'dry' gneisses of the east. occurence in the South of Scourian amphib- gneiss. Region seems dian c ui r complex of South Harris. Harris Complex. olite facies met'ism. generally devoid of fo U tru Scourian rocks and strua- s Lax — +

e tares due to massive ks

Pr Lax' reworking. oo r r Table 1.1 Structural correlations in the Outer Hebrides. c ► Locality Rock Material Method Date Ref. Roneval pegmatite Ksp K-Ar 1140± 70 1. Chaipaval pegmatite Ksp K-Ar 1110- 70 1. pegmatite Ksp K-Ar •10604 70 1. Shillay pegmatite Ksp Rb-Sr 1655± 60 2. Harris pegmatite Ab Rb-Sr 2504 90 2. Chaipaval pegmatite Mu Rb-Sr 15704 40 3. Chaipaval pegmatite Mu Rb-Sr 16104 35 3. 1440± 40 Northton schist Bi Rb-Sr 3. Northton schist Bi Rb-Sr 15004 40 3. Sletteval pegmatite Bi Rb-Sr 1530± 30 3. Sletteval pegmatite Bi Rb-Sr 14504 30 3. Rodil marble Ph Rb-Sr 1510+ 40 3. Chaipaval pegmatite Mu K-Ar 1570± 80 3. Chaipaval pegmatite Ur U-Pb 14901 35 4. Loch a'Sgurr pegmatite Ur U-Pb 1565+ 100 5. Chaipaval pegmatite Mo U-Pb 1565± 100 5. Barra pegmatite w.r. Pb-Sr 2535± 50 6. Barra ultrabasic Ho K-Ar 2585 6. Harris granites w.r. Rb-Sr. 1700± 34 7. Harris granites Zi U-Pb 1715+ 10 7. Harris grey gneiss Zi U-Pb 27704 10 8. Harris grey gneiss Zi U-Pb 1715± 60 8. South Uist pegmatite w.r. Rb-Sr 25604 80 9. Lewis basic dyke w.r. K-Ar 2440± 60 10. Harris grey gneiss Zi Rb-Sr 2690± 140 11. Harris grey gneiss Zi Pb-Pb 26404 120 11.

1. Holmes et al, 1955 2. Smales et al, 1958 3. Giletti et al, 1961 4. Bowie, 1962 5. Bowie, 1964 6. Francis et al, 1971 7. van Breeman et al, 1971 8. Pidgeon at al, 1972 9. Lambert et al, 1970 10. Lambert et a1, 1970 11. Moorbath et al, 1975

Table 1.2 Summary table of available age dates, Outer Hebrides (After Dickinson, 1974)

16 1.4 The geology of North Harris- introduction

As will be described in more detail in chapter 2 little direct evidence of the nature of a pre-Laxfordian complex is retained in North Harris and the effects of Laxfordian tectonic and metamorphic events therefore predominate. Areas of very low Laxfordian strain in which Scourian structures are preserved, such as have been described elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides, are not recognised and evidence of the nature of an early complex lies in the scattered occurences of Scourian agmatites, pegmatite veins, minor folds and basic-ultrabasic rocks none of which are very common. This early complex was cut by a suite of basic intrusions- the Scourie Dykes In North Harris they are remarkably abundant and variations in the degree of their disruption and deformation give a possible indication of variations in Laxfordian strain throughout the region. The original orientation of many of these dykes is considered to have been NE-SW. After emplacement of the Scourie Dykes the region suffered metamorphism at amphibolite facies. Associated with this metamorphic episode, which extended throughout the period, were several phases of deformation of which F2 was the most pervasive and during which the strong NW-SE fabrics, so typical of the region, were developed. Locally granulite facies assemblages were produced in the basic rocks but such assemblages are not preserved in the gneisses. The late Laxfordian is characterised by metamorphism at low amphibolite facies during which migmatisation, with the production of granites and pegmatites, was locally intensely developed. Contemporaneous with and spatially related to this phase of granite production folds on E-W lines and with somewhat variable style were developed. The close of the tectono-metamorphic history of the region was marked by mild cataclasis, the emplacement of N-S quartz veins and some greenschist retrogression in the extreme south-east of the region.

17 1.5 Geochemistry: aims and results

Little in the way of systematic analytical work had been carried out on the gneisses and granites of the Outer Hebrides, nor on the Scourie Dyke rocks and it eas thought that such a body of information would prove useful in itself. Since the start of the work it has become apparent that I.G.S. have also been carrying out analyt- ical work, chiefly on the granitic rocks but including also gneisses and basic rocks, and there has been a considerable exchange of analytical data. With regard to east North Harris itself a regional study of the geochemistry was made in an attempt to explain gross regional variations in lithology observed in the field and also with a view to studying the poss- ibiity that geochemical changes were associated with variations in Laxfordian deformation.

Study of the basic and ultrabasic rocks of the Scourie Dykes was carried out for similar reasons; that is to add to existing information and to study specific problems. Both whole rock and mineral chemistry was studied in these rocks.

The gneisses have been found to show gross litholog- ical and chemical variations that can be directly correl- ated, and some 'interelationship of chemistry and def- ormation have been observed (certain areas of high Laxfordian deformation having relatively high volatile contents in the gneisses). In addition to these special features the gneisses showed 'typical' features of amphibolite facies gneisses and are very similar in composition to Grey Gneisses recorded elsewhere, both in the Outer Hebrides and on the mainland. The Scourie Dyke rocks yielded very interesting geochemical data. On the basis of petrology and geoch- emistry the rocks have been divided into two groups, the first tholeiitic (with clinopyroxene) and the precursor of the majority of the amphibolites in the region, and the second noritic and including the layered ultrabasic of Maaruig. Mineral chemistry gave a basis for PIT

18 estimations which showed that metamorphic conditions throughout the area were quite constant, and thus by Implication that the variations in the rsineral assemb- lages of both the Scourie Dykes and the gneisses were

due to variations in PH2O (or some similar factor) rather than metamorphic conditions.

The full details of this analytical work are given in chapters 3,4 and 5.

1.6 Format of the thesis

While covering a large number of topics the thesis contains only six chapters of which the first is the present introduction and the last a brief summing-up of results. Thus the remaining four chapters are rather long and of complex structure. For this reason a contents list is given at the beginning of each chapter and should be referred to to obtain the general structure and sequence of topics in the chapter. Generally division of the longer chapters into sections labelled by letters is 'overprinted' by a sequential numbering of headings and sub-headings, the latter involving a third subscript. Thus one might have:

SECTION A: The price of stuffed moles 1.1 Source of moles 1.2 Cost of stuffing 1.2.1 Labour 1.2.2 Materials 1.2.3. Taxation SECTION B: Results 1.3 Aesthetics 1.4 etc. and so on through the whole chapter Such a scheme was adopted to avoid the highly complicated

numbering schemes of some theses. t

Chapter 2 deals with the structural history of the region and is intended to be both a general account of the structure and a 'background' of information given before the petrological and geochemical data is presented. Chapter 3 discusses the petrology and chemistry of the gneisses and includes a shorter section on the granitic rocks. Chapters 4 and 5 concern the petrology and whole rock chemistry and mineral chemistry respectively of the basic and ultrabasic rocks of the region.

All diagrams, maps and photographs are classed as figures and numbered sequentially through the chapter. Tables are referred to as 'Tables' and also numbered sequentially. After the bibliography appendices are given of analytical methods and geochemical results. These include the bare minimum of data, norms and so on not being included in an attempt to save both time and space.

20 Chapter 2

Structural History

Round and round the rugged rocks The ragged rascal ran. Anon.

21

Chapter 2

Contents Introduction 23 Section A: Pre-Laxfordian structures 25 2.1 The gneisses 25 2.2 The Scourie Dykes 27 Section B= Laxfordian Structures 28 2.3 F 1 structures 28 2.4 F2 structures 30 2.4.1 Major structures 2.4.2 Minor structures (i) Folds (ii) Boudinage (iii) Shear zones 2.4.3 Fabric development (i) The gneisses (ii) The Scourie Dykes 2.4.4 Large scale variations in Laxfordian strain 2.4.5 Conclusions 2.5 F3 structures 49 2.5.1 Introduction 2.5.2 Structures 2.6 Dyke deformation: orientation and competence contrast 55

2.7 Late structures 60 2.7.1 F4 structures 2.7.2 Quartz veins 2.7.3 The Outer Hebrides Thrust Zone 2.7.4 Jointing 2.7.5 Tertiary dykes

2.8 General conclusions 65

22 Chapter 2

Introduction

The region is made up of biotite, and hornblende- biotite 'Grey Gneisses' whose origins lie in Scourian episodes of deformation and metamorphism of which little evidence now remains. The rocks of the early complex were cut by basic rocks of the Scourie Dyke suite and all rocks were metamorphosed and deformed during the Laxfordian period. In the late Laxfordian episodes gra nites and pegmatites were produced, locally in North Harris but on a large scale in the migmatite complex to the west, the development of which was accomp- anied by recrystallisation an d deformation of the host rocks.

The tectonic history revealed in the region is dominated by Laxfordian events which may be divided into four phases of deformation of which only two were of major improtance. Metamorphism was contemporaneous with all phases of deformation as a continuous process, at amphibolite facies grade. The final important product of metamorphism was the local development of granites and pegmatites, principally in the west of the area. Pre-Laxfordian features are poorly preserved. The most obvious early structural feature now remaining is the gneissic banding which, as is described below, owes its origin to both Scourian and Laxfordian deformation the Scourian component having been flattened and rein- forced by new Laxfordian fabrics. Early folds are probably represented in the region but positive ident- ification of such structures is always difficult relying as it does in these terrains on cross-cutting relationships between foliations, pegmatites and basic rocks of the Scourie Dyke suite. Indeed the rocks of this suite are of vital importance in elucidating the relative ages of the structural events of the Lewisian in general. It is generally assumed that the Scourie Dykes were emplaced more or less as one sequence of intrusions cross-cutting the earlier rocks and fabrics

23 and being themselves deformed and metamorphosed by Laxfordian events. A note of caution is nevertheless required when using amphibolites as 'time-markers' for the positive identification of Scourie Dyke material is often difficult and, as is described in section 2.4 below, the Scourie Dykes of this region show interesting variations in orientation and deformation when compared with those of the mainland which suggests the possibility of two phases of intrusion.

Separating structural events is based on grouping the structures they produce on the basis of the following criteria: a) style b) orientation of structural elements c) relationships between large and small structures d) interference of one structure by another. Valid assumptions concerning age-relationships can only be made when several of these criteria have been fulfilled and even then misinterpretation can occur. Style is particularly notorious being often quite variable, even in the products of the same phase of deformation (eg. the various styles of F2 or F3 folds shown below). Orientation can be equally troublesome with a wide variation of original trends being produced in the same episode and with the reorientation of structures by later events. Given a region of sufficient size- and hence some degree of structural homogeneity- it is possible to collate all available data and produce a cogent history of events, and such is the case presented below.

The chapter is intended to provide a general account of the structure of the area and is not therefore present- ed as a detailed structural analysis. It also serves as a general account of some of the important features of the geology of the region ref„fered to in the more detailed petrological and geochemical studies of the later chapters.

24 Section A: Pre-Laxfordian structures

2.1 The gneisses

By far the most important early structure is the gneissic banding much of which is described as pre- Laxfordian for the following reasons: a) Scourie dykes are seen to cut a pre-existing banding; although actual discordances are uncommon they do occur throughout the region. b) Early Laxfordian structures are superimposed on a pre- existing banding whilst later events involve the prod- uction of new Laxfordian components in the gneiss fabric. c) The gneisses have yielded an age of 2700 my (Pidgeon and Aftalion, 1972) using zircons from a sample at Bunaveneader.

The banding is defined by a compositional layering between basic and felsic bands and pegmatite layers. Myers (1968) divided the gneisses of western Harris into several types on the basis of the nature of this banding a division shown in fig:2.1. Also in this diagram (which is taken from Myers, 1970) are trends of evolution connecting gneiss types that could be followed during deformation. As a descriptive scheme it has considerable value but unless the relative ages of the fabric components can be evaluated it can be used merely as a guide to the form of the gneisses of the early complex and to the effects of deformation on these rock types. For example there is little doubt that the agmatite and hornblende pod gneisses point to the existence of early basic and ultrabasic layers (originally either intrusions or volcanics) but so toamust some of the amphibolite layers, now indistinguishable from the Scourie Dyke amphibolite layers.

Small scale pre-Laxfordian structures may also be present but remain unrecognised due to a lack of conv- incing evidence as to their age, small irregular structures which do occur being generally classed as early Laxfordian (F1 ). To the west such folds were classed as Scourian by Myers (1968) and it is therefore likely that structures of both ages are present in D

• A. .LE A.

•-- — r-r7rrig-r1-71-177r 7-7V "."7.—,"7" •

ca.

— • - — ve.mvesstir..W.: •zia. Ca — •

• v. F ■ .* H ii. A •—• D C iv. 0 K

The main pre-Laxfordian gneiss types of Western Harris; A. foliated basic agmatitc gneiss. F. biotitc-bandcd gneiss. B. amphibolitc-banded gneiss. G. weakly biotitc-bandcd gneiss. C. amphibolite-striped gneiss. H. massive biotitc-foliated gneiss. D. amphibolite-lens gneiss. J. weakly amphibolitc-banded gneiss. E. pcgmatiic-banded gneiss. K. hombicndite-pod gneiss.

Fig:2.1 Lewisian gneiss types (from Myers, 1970).

26 both areas.

The picture thus emerges of a banded gneiss complex which contained deformed intrusives/volcanics and pegmat- ites prior to the emplacement of the Scourie Dykes. The existence of such a complex leads to the suggestion of relatively high grade metamorphic conditions during its formation, with the production of banded gneisses,and pegmatites and the deformation and metamorphism of early basic rocks but the details of these events have been obliterated by the Laxfordian episodes. In Chapter 3, on the basis of mineralogical and geochemical variations over the region as a whole, original lithological variations are suggested.:

2.2 The Scourie Dykes

The Scourie Dykes are themselves pre-Laxfordian in age, intruding the rocks of the early complex prior to Laxfordian events. Their petrology and geochemistry are described in Chapters 4 and 5 but as their distrib- ution and general form are governed by Laxfordian deformation these features are discussed in the present chapter. Their distribution and fabrics are discussed in section 2,4.3 and general considerations regarding their deformation in section 2.6. Originally tholeiitic they now exhibit predominantly metamorphic assemblages and textures, original igneous material being preserved in only a few localities in the east and north-east of the region. Deformation has resulted in the obliteration of the original orientation and form of these intrusions and the loss of discordant contacts. It seems likely that they were emplaced as dykes and, as discussed below, were intruded as a swarm with an approximate NE-SW trend, a trend at some variance with that of the mainland

27 Section 6: Laxfordian deformation

Laxfordian tectonic activity may be subdivided into four episodes, of which the second and third are of major importance; the degree to which these events may be regarded as separate entities is rather debatable. The main features of the four phases are as follows:

F1 irregular folds; rare fabrics; poorly represented F2 main fold phase on all scales, NW-SE trend of axial planes with predominant SE plunge. Strong planar fabrics are developed i n all rock types E-W oriented folds correlated directly with areas of granitic rocks. Some recrystallisation of earlier fabrics; little new fabrics F4 minor N-S buckles; infrequent and of little import' Late stage cataclasis.

2.3 structures F1

A phase of dubious significance, little now remains of the first structures but some scattered small, irregular folds. These structures are often rather open and lacking in fabrics. Notable exceptions are seen, fig:2.2 showing somewhat diagrammatically the occurence of possible F1 foliation in several amphibolite lenses. Of the three only (a) is unequivocal, an early foliation being folded by F2 deformation. The other examples could relate to F2. deformation as is described below (2.4.3). These examples occur in widely separated exposures and as they are defined by amphibolite facies minerals it seems that at least partial amphibolitisation of these basic rocks took place during F1 . The lack of F1 fabrics marks a distinction between this region and that of the Southern Isles (Coward, Francis, Graham; all 1969 PhD's) where the foliation of the Scourie Dykes is produced primarily during the first identifiable phase of Laxfordian deformation. Possible F1 folds are involved in interference structures with F2 folds in the Tarbert region.

28 Fig:2.2 Possible Fl foliations in basic bands and lenses. 2.4 F2 structures

The F2 episode was the major Laxfordian tectonic event of the region. It produced innumerable minor folds, major folds outlined by the Scourie Dykes, strong planar fabrics in all rocks and was responsible for all the major trends in the region as seen today.

2.4.1 Major structures

The foliation trend map of fig:2.3 was produced by plotting the strikes and dips of banding and foliation of the gneisses on a map and extrapolating trend lines on the basis of the plotted data points. The foliation Is oriented generally NW-SE, dipping to the SW with little variation. Large-scale fold structures are un- common although some do occur in association with folded Scourie Dykes while others may be inferred from closure of the foliation-banding in certain areas. A map showing the distribution of pods and lenses of basic rocks (regarded as derivatives of the Scourie Dykes) is shown in fig:2.4- the actual distribution is given in fig:4.1. On this map the areas in which basic rocks are abundant are outlined and, as may be seen, these regions seem to exhibit the effects of large scale folding. No attempt was made to contour the distribution of basic lenses by methods such as that suggested by Lisle (see Myers 1971) and the map thus represents the results of 'in situ' field observation rather than any statistical assesment. The trails of dyke fragments are discordant to the gneiss banding and the overall trend of the enveloping surfaces is NNE-SSW. The orientation of the axial traces suggested in the map is NW-SE and field evidence- particularly that of the larger folded basic masses such as that at Ardvourlie and Maaruig (see Chapter 4)- points to a general, moderate south-easterly plunge of the fold structures and a south-westerly dip of axial planes.

• The presence of large fold structures in the basic rocks with a general absence of structures of similar 31 Fig:2.4 The distribution of basic and ultrabasic rocks: the great majority occur within the stippled zones. (see also Fig:4.1).

32 size in the gneisses leads to interesting speculation on the orientation of both the gneissic banding and, particularly, the dykes prior to their deformation. In 19g:2.5 a greatly simplified sequence of events in the deformation of Scourie Dykes and gneissic banding by F2 deformation is suggested based on the following features and assumptions: a)' The gneisses lack many large-scale folds; the predominant trend of the banding is NW-SE b) The distribution of basic rocks shows evidence of large-scale folds oriented on NW-SE axial planes. c) F1 deformation was minor; the structures of the area are principally due to F2 deformation d) The original orientation of the dykes was more or less parallel to the direction of maximum compressive stress to allow the production of the large folds of f ig :2-4. From these considerations, in fig:2.5 it is suggested that- prior to Laxfordian deformation— the Scourie Dykes were aligned approximately NE-SW with a high angular discordance to the gneissic banding (whose exact form and orientation are unknown). Subsequent deformation led to folding and finally flattening and boudinage of the dykes with the production of bands and lenses concordant with the gneissic banding. This banding, on the other hand, was subject to transposition and flattening and the imposition of new Laxfordian fabrics, few folds being produced.

The suggestion that the original orientation of the Scourie_ Dykes was NE-SW is at some variance with the orientation of Scourie Dykes on the mainland whic are of ESE-WNW trend. Myers (1968) studying the gneisses of west North Harris came to the same conclusion as to the original orientation of the dykes, for similar reasons, and it seems, therefore, that in North Harris there is evidence of a suite of Scourie Dykes of differing orientation to those of the mainland and elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides.

33 SW —~ F--- NE

a).Trend of Scourie Dykes discordant to original gneissic banding.

b) Deformation causes transposition and flattening of the gneissic banding and folding of the basic 'layers'.

Fig :2.5 Schematic representation of the possible sequence of events during F2 deformation.

34 2.4.2 Minor structures a) dol ds

Minor folds of this phase occur throughout the region. On the whole they show considerable uniformity of style and orientation, being typically isoclines whose axial traces are oriented NW-SE, and whose plunge is to the,SE. Some variations in style are to be seen, however, examples being shown in fig:2.6 but there is no systematic distribution of such variations. Their relative age is generally easily determined by virtue of their abundance, style and orientation and also by their effect on the Scourie Dykes (figs:2.6, 15 and 16) and by the various interference structures between succesive fold phases (fig:2.7).

) Boudinage

While 'classic' boudinage is not a common feature In the region the Scourie Dykes show evidence throughout the area of flattening, attenuation and disruption in 'boudinage-like' phenomena.(fig:2.8). The form of boudinage depends on the degree of flattening and on the competence difference between the enclosed and enclosing layers, fig:2.9 (from Ramsay, 1967) showing the general form that boudins could be expected to take given varying degrees of flattening and viscosity contrast. The most common boudins in the basic rocks of North Harris are somewhat squat lens- shapes suggesting a relatively large competence contrast between them and the gneisses; less commonly longer, thinner forms are seen suggesting a somewhat lower competence contrast. The two types, with the former predominant, are widespread. (see also section 2.6). c) Shear zones

Small shear zones are infrequently seen in the gneisses and some basic rocks. In the Tarbert region, where the majority of examples are to be found, some quite large shear zones- up to 10 metres across- are visible in quarries and road cuttings. In these zones the gneisses suffered cataclasis with grain-size 35 Fig:2.6 F2 fold styles

a) F2 fold in amphibolite banded gneiss b) F2 fold with limb pegmatite. Note offset along peg'.

36 Fig:2.7 interference structure in a thin basic layer ) Gullaval Glas. The effects of all three phases of Laxfordian folding can be suggested in this structure. i f

(a)

(b)

Fig: 2.8 Boudin types Of the two, type (a) is perhaps the most common, both in size and style.

38 B

II' Ī . ii, IlY _ i. I.

' 111 • ir. ~'Y' I'~ j~

:a: .V.~• p•i r,l.

I I 4 ina

( I •I,+;~~ii~ j. 999 .Y I 11'I'~) . IPI IJ ,d. IIII~ prP~l~

The progressive development of boandiage. The competent bands I, 2, 3, and 4 are arranged hi decreasing order of coinperence, and hand 4 has the same properties as the matrix.

Fig:2.9 Diagram indicating the forms of boudinage with varying competence contrasts. (From Ramsay, )967).

39 reduction and the production of quartz 'ribbons' (see section 3.5); occasionally highly flattened isoclinal folds are associated with these shears. The zones parallel the foliation and banding of the gneisses and seem_to be rather discontinuous along their length. Few large shear zones of this type are seen outside the Tarbert region and they seem to be a rather local development, possibly related to the high water content of the gneisses of this area (Chapter 3).

2.4.3 Fabric development

The development of fabrics during F2 deformation was everywhere intense but such development was greatly controlled by the rock type in which it took place. Hence the fabrics of the gneisses and of the basic rocks are described separately.

a) The gneisses

The strongest fabric element of the gneisses is the planar component of foliation (defined by Hobbs et al, 1976, as "..any surface in metamorphic rocks be that due to composition, oriented minerals, grain size variations, etc.) within which is incorporated a locally strong linear component. As suggested earlier some of the foliation was derived by transposition of pre-existing fabrics but the intensity of F2 deformation was such that much must have been produced as a new Laxfordian foliation. In areas of late Laxfordian granites recrystallisation causes the reduction of F2 fabrics but completely massive rocks are rare.

The coarsest fabric elements of the gneisses are represented by 1ithologica1 variations- amphibolite layers, pegmatites and so on- as are schematically shown in fig:2,1, the coarsest of all being produced by the basic layers and lenses derived by the deformation of Scourie Dykes.

40 On a somewhat smaller scale .the gneisses throughout the region exhibit a foliation defined most frequently by the preferred orientation of biotite. A strong fabric element it serves to emphasise the lithological banding and becomes the only planar fabric in the more homog- eneous gneisses. As may be seen in fig:2.3 the foliation has a strong NW-SE trend, the predominant dip being to the SW, although this latter can be somewhat variable in both direction and degree. in the extreme north and north-west of the area.

A strong linear component, almost invariably defined by the preferred orientation of both individual quartz grains and quartz aggregates (although hornblende - lineations also occur), is seen throughout the region. Locally such fabrics may be intensely developed and it Is likely that this represents original variations in its production rather than the effects of later recrys- tallisation. In the region as a whole, however, planar fabrics predominate. b) The Scourie Dykes

Basic layers and lenses derived from the Scourie Dykes show little evidence of having developed fabrics during F1 , the few examples that do having already been described. Thus by far the most important fabric development in these rocks took place during F2 deformation. Not all the basic rocks exhibit fabrics; rocks with relict igneous textures and mineralogies were obviously untouched by such processes but lenses and bands of amphibolites whose assemblages are metamorphic and which appear to have been deformed may also be fabric-free. Whether this feature is due to a lack of fabric development originally or to subsequent loss by recrystallisation is difficult to assess. As in the gneisses, the fabrics are generally a combination of a strong planar foliation which incorp- orates a weaker, but occasionally strong, linear element. Sometimes fabrics are strictly axial planar, developed only at fold hinges, while in other cases the whole of a body can develop a foliation. In larger units foliation is commonly only produced at the margins 41 leaving a massive core of amphibolite or, possibly, relict igneous material (see Chapter 4). In such cases fabric development can be traced from the original igneous texture to foliated amphibolite. Typical stages in this development are outlined below: a) The original texture is preserved, sometimes with a relatively unchanged original igneous mineralogy b) Static metamorphism may create mottled rocks in which the original texture is mimetically preserved. Such is the origin of many of the 'sub-ophitic' textures commonly reffered to.in the Scourie Dykes, although such textures may also be produced as metamorphic textures. c) Development of a weak fabric with elongate minerals, or streaked-out mineral aggregates (from b) aligned in the foliation. Both mafic and felsic minerals can produce such streaks (fig:2.10). d) Strong fabrics developed. More amphibole is present and original igneous mineralogy and texture is lost. Segregation of the minerals into bands may occur. e) Fabric fully developed; texture may coarsen if rock suffers recrystallisation. The mineralogy is now that typical of an amphibolite (hornblende-feldspar).

One folded basic layer in which such textural variations are traced is found just south of Ardvourlie in the north-east of the region. Here a core of orthopyroxene-plagioclase rocks with relict textures is surrounded by a variety of amphibolite types with a range of textures varying from coarse mottled meta- dolerites to strongly foliated simple amphibolites. The foliation dips at some 30-35° to the SW and is axial-planar, the overall fold structure itself being strongly asymetric with a sub-vertical northern limb and gently dipping southern limb, the shallow dip creating a large area of outcrop of these rocks.

42 (a) Feldspar streaks in amphibolite

(b) Hornblende 1 ir+eat ion in amphibolite, Clett Ard

Fig:2.10 Mineral fabrics in amphibol ices

43 In a region just east of Tarbert some rather unusual fabrics are devloped, generally in thin concordant layers. Examples are given in fig;2.11 in which can be seen foliations set oblique to the margins of the layers, an orientation thought to be due to shearing of the basic rock during fabric development. In another example the contact of the gneiss and amphibolite shows 'intermixing' with small blebs and lenses of amphibolite incorporated in the gneiss. These features are ref/erēd to again in section 2.6 for they suggest that in this area at least some of the Scourie Dykes behaved as the incompetent member during deformation. They may represent yet another feature relating to the high volatile contents of the.gneisses of the Tarbert area. All fabric development of the basic rocks relates to F2 deformation, a fact which seems to distinguish North Harris from the Southern Isles where the fabrics were developed in the first recognised phase of Laxfordian deformation, and only modified by later events.

2.4.4 Large scale variations in Laxfordian strain

Elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides- notably in northern Lewis and parts of the Southern Isles- distinctions are made between areas of only modest and areas of high Laxfordian reworking of the early complex. The areas - - - -'- _ _ * - R .. _~ _ The areas of relatively low Laxfordian strain are characterised by the retention of Scourian fabrics and structures, preservation of discordances between Scourie Dykes and the gneissic banding and the retention of early textures and mineralogies of both the gneisses and the Scourie Dykes. Table 2.1, taken from Davies et al (1975), is based on studies of the Lewisian of northern Lewis and gives the general features of the three zones of progressively increasing Laxfordian reworking that are seen in the region. When applied to North Harris it is evident that some of the features- notably those concer- ning the Scourie Dykes- can be used to define areas of possible low Laxfordian deformation. Bearing in mind

44 sv • (eaJe WOJj • I~sOW) spueq iseq u suoi~E iiOJ ,5no eiuoue, 4 0 saLdwex: tl'Z:G!d Areas of low strain Areas of moderate strain Areas of high strain

Grey gneiss and supracrustal belts I Pre-Laxfordian migmatitic struc- Pre-Laxfordian structures distorted Pre-Laxfordian structures strongly tures and veins well preserved distorted

2 Mesoscopic shape-fabric LYS, Mesoscopic shape-fabric shows Mesoscopic shape-fabric S> L, large pre-Laxfordian component varying types and relationships large Laxfordian component

3 Anhydrous mineral assemblages As in areas of low strain Anhydrous mineral assemblages locally preserved in rocks of supra- very rare. amphibolite facies crustal belts, amphibolite-facies assemblages dominant assemblages dominant

Scourie dyke suite 4 Intrusive habit often clearly recog- Intrusive habit locally recognisable, Intrusive habit seldom recognis- nisable, many intrusions obviously a few intrusions discordant able, discordant contacts vers rare discordant and steep -

5 Primary plagioclase, pyroxene, Primary minerals rarely preserved, No remnants of primary minerals, (olivine) in centres of large meta- mimetically-preserved primary tex- remnants of primary textures very dolerites, primary subophitic tex- tures widespread only in inner sub- rare tures mimetically preserved in zone many intrusions .

6 Anhydrous metamorphic assem- Anhydrous assemblages in centres Anhydrous assemblages not rec- blages preserve a centres of many of metadolerites common only in orded metadolerites inner sub-zone

7 Widespread amphibolitisation As in areas of low strain, most Amphibolisation almost universal, intrusions foliated most intrusions foliated

Gneisses and Scourie dykes 8 d2 folds open, associated fabrics d2 folds tight to isoclinal, associ- d2 folds tight to isoclinal, associ- weak ated fabrics of variable F.rength ated fabrics usually strong

9 Dominant textures reflect recrystal- As in areas of low strain, but later As in areas of moderate strain lisation during and after d2 reductions of grain-size important in some regions

Table:2.1 Features of the Lewisian complex of Lewis in relation to variations in Laxfordian strain. (From Davies, et al; 1975) .

46 that the region as a whole shows evidence of considerable Laxfordian structural and metamorphic activity and an absence of preserved Scourian structures and lithologies, It nonetheless possible to define three structural zones (fig:2.12) based on the following features of the Scourie Dykes:

Zone 1: relatively low Laxfordian reworking in which Scourie Dykes occur as large, continuous folded units with some preservation. of original igneous mineralogies and textures and the preservation of discordant contacts Zone 11: moderate Laxfordian reworking in which the dykes are now more disrupted, lack igneous minerals- but may have mimetically preserved textures. The typical assemblage is that of ciinopyroxene-amphiboiite. Zone 111: relatively high Laxfordian reworking in which the basic rocks occur as small lenses and bands, all concordant to the gneissic. banding. Simple amphibolites predominate in the assem- blages. The area (around Tarbert) also shows other structural features such as shear-zones, unusual fabrics in basic rocks and no large folds in the gneisses and all may relate to the high volatile contents of the gneisses in the area (see Chapter 3).

Throughout all zones the gneisses show no variations which could correlate with the features of the basic rocks, for anhydrous assemblages are not seen- even in zone 1-,strong planar fabrics are everywhere dominant and only Laxfordian structures are found.

2.4.5 Conclusions

The F2 phase of deformation was the most important of the Laxfordian episodes in that it alone affected the complex and all its constituents as a whole generating

47 Fig:2.12 Zones of variable Laxfordian strain (see text for details)

Areas of relict igneous mineralogies in Scourie Dykes

48 pervasive fabrics and a range of structures on all scales from the major folds outlined by the trails of basic rocks down to microscopic fabrics. So common are the structures produced that their age is rarely in doubt. Areas of variable Laxfordian reworking can be suggested on the basis of features seen in the Scourie Dykes, a large region of moderate reworking containing both relatively low deformation areas in which original igneous features are preserved and a region of high deformation in which a variety of structural features are possibly created by a relatively high water content In the gneisses.

2.5 F structures

2.5.1 introduction

The late Laxfordian episode was marked by the prod- uction of granites and pegmatites in the west and south of the region (see fig:3.l). The fullest development of.these granitic rocks is seen in the migmatite complex described by Myers (1968,1970,1971) which extends from South Harris, across west North Harris and into the Uig Hills. In east North Harris the granites are local 'in situ' bodies apparently produced by the progressive metasomatism and recrystallisation of the host gneisses to give a weakly foliated granite gneiss or granite s.s. The granites are found in association with areas of flat-lying gneisses- chiefly in the hills of Clisham and Tomnaval and at Tarbert- structures which may represent the largest F3 structures of the region. The distribution of the F3 structures correlates directly with the areas of granitic rocks and are thus concentrated in the west and south. This relationship is one they share with the F3 structures of western 'Harris which were shown by Myers (1968) to be more fully developed in the granite-migmatite area than in the grey gneiss to the east.

49 2.5.2 Structures A

The chief product of this period of tectonic activity are small folds (up to lm in amplitude) with steep axial planes, axial traces oriented E-W, and with variable plunge. They are somewhat variable in style (fig:2.13) and often incorporate pegmatites. On a larger scale- up to 20m or so- the F3 :folds are geniculate structures with the same orientation; folds of this style are best developed at Tarbert. In fig:2.8 such a structure is seen to refold F2 and possible F1 folds in a thin Scourie Dyke amphibolite. The largest structures are thought to be those producing the flat-lying gneisses of Clisham and Tarbert. Nowhere else in the region are such areas of flat-lying gneisses seen and the spatial correlation with the granites would suggest some relationship between the two. Perhaps the simplest explanation of these areas is that they represent local, large monoclinal folds, developed-.on steep axial planes, within the otherwise south-westerly dipping gneisses. F3 fabrics are rarely developed. Occasional axial-planar fabrics are produced by biotite but such developments are quite variable. Of interest in this connection, however, is the observation that the gneisses within the region of granitic rocks show text- ural features suggesting that deformation was concentrated in that area. Outside this region coarse gneissose textures are the norm suggesting some degree of post-F2 recrystallisation.(see section 3.5).

In the migmatite complex of western Harris Myers describes an F3 history that is much more complete than that recorded in east North Harris. The granites occur both as 'in situ' and intrusive masses; the contact between the granitic rocks and the host gneisses can be mapped out and the transition between them studied; pegmatite phases can be better differentiated and F3 structures are better developed. However , the overall pattern for both regions is much the same with a stronger development of F2 in east North Harris.

50 Fig:2.13 F3 fold styles, fabrics and intereferende structures. Pegmatites are shown in black.

51 (a) F 3 fold with weak axial planar Fabric

(b) Highly irregular F3 Folds in pegmatite/gneiss

Fig 2.13 F3 Fold styles and interFerence structures (see over.)

52 (c) F3-F2 interference structure

Fig:4.13 Continued.

53 2.6 Dyke deformation: orientation and competence contrast

After describing the structures developed in the Scourie Dykes and their value in chronology, defining structures and distinguishing possible regions of variable F2 deformation it is perhaps valuable to describe, in retrospect, the deformation of the Scourie Dykes more thoroughly. Controlling factors in dyke deformation are: a) application of sufficient stress b) suitable orientation of the dyke with regard to the stress system c) contrasting material properties between the dyke and its host rock. Of these three only (a) i s_ a major prerequisite, the others controlling the type and style of the structures produced only if (a) is satisfied, that the Scourie Dykes of the area are deformed shows that it was.

Estimation of the original orientation of the dykes is problematical. The original form of the intrusions is unknown and they could have been irregular in both orientation and form, deformation has obliterated most discordances between the dykes and the gneissic banding and those discordances which remain are only of the order of lO-200 (fig:2.14). The Scourie Dykes of the mainland take the form of parallel dyke-like intrusions with an ESE-WNW trend and it is tempting to.postulate a similar form and orient- ation for the dykes of the Outer Hebrides. Such is indeed the case in certain areas of the Outer isles (eg. Great Bernera, Watson 1968) but for the reasons given earlier it is thought that, prior to deformation, the dykes of North Harris had a NE-SW or NNE-SSW trend cutting quite strongly across the gneissic banding. Whether the dykes with this trend (which is suggested by Myers for western Harris and by Drs.Fettes and Smith for , pers,conm.) were emplaced at one and the same time as the dykes elsewhere is not certain, but there is no reason why it should not be the case.

55 0

(b)

Fig :2.14 Examples of discordances between amphiboiite bands and the gneissic fabrics. Note the small folded pegmatite in (a)

56 The third factor to be considered is that of competence contrast between the basic rocks and their host gneisses, absence of which would have led to homogeneous deformation and an absence of folds and other structures even though the rocks would have suffered considerable strain. The presence of folds, 'S A~ boudinage and so on~a competence contrast did exist between the basic rocks and the gneisses and from the style of the folds and boudinage it seems that the basic rocks were the more competent of tF two. In fig:2.15 for example, a thin folded amphibolite layer is enclosed by gneisses which exhibit extreme extension and flattening at the fold hinge and one is left with little doubt as to which was the more competent layer during their deformation. Such an extreme degree of difference in fold styles is not a common feature, however, and estimation of the competence contrast becomes more difficult. In an attempt to make such an estimate dip- isogons may be used, drawn on photographs of the fold profile. for several reasons the method is faced with difficulties: a) the original shape of the layer is unknown b) very few examples are suited to such analysis, many folds having suffered later deformation (fig:2.16x). In the fold of this figure, for example, different competence contrasts were obtained at almost every inflexion point while interference structures such as is shown in fig:2.16b obviously cannot be used. Boudinage allows for rather more satisfactory solutions as it is possible to suggest the shape of boudins that would be expected with a given degree of flattening and competence contrast,(fig:2.14). As was described above the stumpy lens-shaped boudins of the region suggest a moderately high competence of the basic rocks for any degree of flattening and their wide distribution suggests that the basic rocks were invariably more competent than their hosts. However, there are examples of structures in which this is demonstrably not the case. As described above (fig:2.12) certain thin basic layers develop a foliation oblique to its margins, a fabric which suggests that the basic rock- acting as the incompetent layer- suffered 57 (b)

Fig:2.15 F2 fold in amphibolite. Note the extreme attenuation of the gneisses at the fold crest (2 views).

58 ;7 __ "`", ðj,.+

♦ i_ J 1

• I J

(a)

(b)

Fig:2.16 (a) Irregular F2 fold, Clett Ard (b) Interference structure in amphibolite

59 shearing during fabric development. These and other such features are somewhat locallised in an area around Tarbert and may be related to the other unusual features of that area. A more common feature is that shown in fig:2.17 where a pegmatite vein cutting a basic layer is buckled while being deformed homogeneously in the gneisses (whose composition it must approximate to and with. which the competence contrast will be low). Such a feature suggests the behaviour òf the basic layer as the least competent of the three rocks involved, assuming that buckling can only occur in:.the more competent material. Such a view is disputed (eg. Watterson,1968) and it may well be that such an interpretation is incorrect. To sum up, therefore, the Scourie Dykes of the region seem to have behaved as the more competent material during deformation, with a few, notable, exceptions. This is in contrast to the interpretation of similar features in the Southern isles by Coward (1969) and Francis (1969) :

2.7 Late structures

A11 events post-dating the F3 episode of deformation and granite production are here classed, albeit arbit- rarily, as 'late{.

2.7.1 Fri structures

In the waning phases of the Laxfordian broad flexures were developed with some 10 or 15m amplitude, oriented approximately N-S and with shallow plunge to the south. They occur chiefly in the west and south of the region (areas which remained tectonically active in late Laxfordian times) but are never a common feature. They affect all pre-existing structures but without causing any important regional effects. Myers (1968) reports them as quite frequently developed structures in west North Harris.

60 (a)

(b)

Fig:2.17 Folded pegmatites contained within amphibolite layers.

61 2.7.2 Quartz veins

Throughout the region thin, lenticular quartz veins are seen infilling fractures and cutting across all structures and fabrics (fig:2.l8). These predominantly N-S oriented quartz veins can be quite large- up to lm in width- and may involve some displacement. They frequently exhibit strong fiaser fabrics; highly deformed examples exhibit a blueish colour and are very distinctive. There seems on this evidence to have been a very late cataclastic phase confined almost solely to the quartz veins and probably contemporaneous with their formation.

2.7.3 The Outer Hebrides Thrust Zone

Whilst east North Harris is considerably removed from any outcrop of the thrust its effects are more pervasive than one at first realises. The photographs of fig:2.19 show two examples of featuresgenerated by the thrust. The first shows N-S, E-W joints in a basic lens, associated with 'flinty- crush' gneisses. Both are cut by thin pseudotachylyte veins. The second shows a pegmatite crushed between lenses of amphibolite, movement of which was caused by the thrust, the whole set again in 'flinty-crush. Such features are sporadically developed throughout the region, crushed gneisses and thin pseudotachylyte veins being the commonest features. The latter are particul- arly common at the contacts of basic lenses and gneisses. Such features commonly occur in lenses or bands oriented N-S but lenses of pseudotachylyte and crushed rocks do occur within and parallel to the foliation, presumably as a line of weakness.

2.7.4 Tertiary Dykes

Thin Tertiary dykes- usually only lOcros or so thick- occasionally with jointing perpendicular to their margins are seen throughout the region. Larger dykes may be porphyritic with augite phenocrysts in an augite- labradorite matrix. One particular example above Tarbert is almost im wide and creates a zone of nornfelses and saussaritis- 62 Fig:2.18 Small quartz vein cutting and offsetting an amphibolite band in grey gneisses

63 (a) Block jointing in amphibolite. Also present were pseudotachylite veins.

(b) Crushed pegmatite (between two amphibolite lenses)

Fig:2.19 Late-stage features of tectonic activity, relating to the Outer Isles thrust.

64 ation in the gneisses it intrudes for up to a metre on either side. Tertiary dykes are not recorded on the maps in this work.

2.7.5 Jointing

Throughout the Outer Hebrides occur N-S, E-W joints. In mapping they come to be ignored unless of some size and involving displacements, and they are not shown on the maps. Aerial photographs show them most clearly and much of the present topography owes its form to the larger examples. An obvious major fault occurs at Tarbert where an imbricate and reddened smash zone some 100m wide is exposed in road cuttings. The fault produces the very marked topographic features of east and west Loch Tarbert and extends at least as far as Scalpay (R.Sibson,pers,comm.) where it cuts Tertiary dykes.

2.8 General Conclusions

The main features and conclusions of the preceeding chapter are here summarised, and will be referred to again in the final chapter.

a) Scourian events, although poorly preserved, involved the production of a high-grade gneiss complex with lithological banding, pegmatites, basic and ultrabasic intrusions or volcanics and a variety of structures. All such features have suffered extensive modification by Laxfordian events.

.b) The early complex was cut by basic and ultrabasic intrusions of the Scourie Dyke suite. Their original form and orientation is obscured by deformation but a general NE-SW trend is suggested on structural grounds. Such a trend is at variance with the Scourie Dykes of the

65 mainland and elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides but a similar trend was suggested in western Harris by Myers (1968) and in North Uist (Drs.Fettes and Smith). It may be that both trends were established in on ly one set of intrusions- as in west Greenland for example.

c) Laxfordian tectonic activity can be divided into four phases of which the first and fourth were of little importance. The apparently simple structure of the region is due to intense deformation during the F2 episode in which old fabrics were transposed and superimposed by new Laxfordian fabrics.

d) The major Laxfordian episode was the second phase (F2). Strong planar fabrics were produced throughout the region; the gneisses were flattened and the Scourie Dykes folded, disrupted and flattened. Little evidence of large-scale structures is seen in the gneisses but the distribution of the basic rocks suggest large scale folds. During the deformation of the dykes they acted as the more competent material. Deformation was more intense in tip Tarbert region, a feature possibly related to relatively high water contents of the gneisses in that area. Elsewhere local, low deformation zones are highlighted by the presence of large, folded basic layers many of which retain either igneous textures, or minerals, or both. e) The last major phase of deformation (F3) was accomp- anied by the production of granitic rocks in the west and south of the region. F3 structures and textures are directly correlated with these areas.

66 Chapter 3

The gneisses: petrology and geochemistry

tFor a stone of stumbling and for a rock of offence'

Isaiah $:14

67

Chapter 3

Contents Introduction 69 Section A: Field relations and petrology 3.1 Lithological banding 70 3,2 Gneiss types and their distribution 71 3.3 Granititc rocks 75 3,4 Mineral assemblages 76 3.5 Textures of the gneisses 83 3.5.1 Textural types 3.5.2 Distribution of the textural types Section B: Geochemistry of the gneisses 3.6 Sampling 87 3.7 Aims of the geochemical study 88 3.8 General chemistry of the gneisses 89 3.8.1 Comparisons with other crustal rocks 3.8.2 Average compositions of the North Harris gneiss types 3.8.3 K/Rb ratios 3.8.4 Variation diagrams 3.8.5 Geochemical evidence for the origin v. of the gneisses 3.9 Comparison with other Lewisian gneisses 109 3.9.1 The Uig Hills 3.9.2 Other Outer Hebrides gneisses 3.9.3 Mainland gneisses Section C: Regional trends in geochemistry 3.10 Trend surface analysis 111 3.10.1 Method 3.10.2 Statistical tests of trends 3.10.3 Problems in trend surface analysis 3.11 Geochemical distributions in North Harris 118 3.12 Discussion and conclusions 125 Section D: The granitic rocjks 3.13 General chemistry of the North Harris granites 127 3.14 Chemical evidence for the origin of the granitic rocks 129 Section E: General conclusions 137

68 Chapter 3

introduction

The 'Grey Gneisses' of North Harris are a rather homogeneous group of banded acid gneisses with subsidiary granitic rocks and rare basic and metasedimentary gneisses. The mineral assemblages are .typical of the amphibolite facies. They may be divided on a basis of the type of banding they exhibit, on their lithology or on their mineralogy, these latter two showing systematic variations throughout the region. The simplest division is on a mineralogical basis; the gneisses falling into either biotite- or hornblende-biotite types. Some chemical distinctions can be made between the two types which allow correlation of regional patterns in geochemistry defined by trend surface analysis with their distribution. Such patterns suggest the preservation of pre-existing lithological variations in the early complex. Granitic rocks,formed by 'in situ' metasomatism of the host gneisses in areas in which the gneisses show evidence of relatively high volatile contents, occur in a N-S belt in the west of the area. Late-stage Laxfordian deformation was concentrated in this region, a feature evidenced by the textural variations developed in the gneisses. Comparisons between the gneisses and granitic rocks of North Harris and elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides and the mainland show the former to be typical of grey gneisses developed throughout the Lewisian. Sampling of the gneisses was extensive; a total of 230 thin sections have been cut and studied and of these samples 105 were subjected to major element analysis and $0 of these used for trace element analysis, the data being presented in the appendices. The chapter is divided into four sections the first describing the petrology of the gneisses, the second giving details of the chemistry of the rocks as a whole

69 but also incorporating details of the variations in chemistry of the main groups. Section C describes the regional geochemical variations as defined by trend surface analysis (the method of which is outlined). The , granitic rocks are discussed in section D and a summary of the important conclusions comprise the final section, section E. a Section A: Field relations and petrology

The gneisses of east North Harris are typical of the banded grey gneisses seen throughout the Outer Hebrides. They are principally acid gneisses, little basic or ultrabasic gneiss being seen, and include local develop- ment of granitic rocks. They differ from the rocks of west North Harris in that the development of such granitic rocks is very much restricted.

3.1 Lithological banding

The most obvious feature of the gneisses is a comp- ositional banding created by the incorporation in the acid gneisses of varying proportions of mafic and pegmatitic material in bands, lenses and pods. Myers (1968) attempted to classify such gneisses in west North Harris on the basis of the type and composition of the banding, his scheme being shown in fig:2.1 of the previous chapter. He then used the various sub-divisions as bases from which to suggest trends in the evolution of the gneiss types during Laxfordian deformation. In east North Harris such a scheme was found useful as a field ctarssification and showed the area to consist predominantly of amphibolite-banded and 'striped gneiss and biotite-banded end foliated gneiss whose distributions are discussed below (section 3.2). Many of the more regular amphibolite bands are believed to represent deformed rocks of the Scourie Dyke suite while the less regular bands and lenses couldfr qually well represent older basic material or even be products of segregation during metamorphism and it is often extremely difficult to differentiate between these possible sources. Where

70 The distributions of the acid gneisses and granitic rocks are shown in fig:3.1. In this map areas In which granite gneiss and pegmatite are abundantly produced are delineated but it must be noted that even in these areas the host gneiss Invariably remains predominant. As can be seen granitic rocks occur chiefly in the west and south with local pegmatite- rich areas to the east of the main belt. s On a mineralogical basis the acid gneisses may be divided into just two groups: a) biotite gneisses b) hornblende-biotite gneisses Other mineralogical variants can then be regarded as 'unusual'; in fact, pyroxene is seen in only two local ites and garnet in only one. Biotite is ubiquitous defining the foliation of these rocks and producing a compositional banding in its own right. Hornblende, on the other hand, although a common constituent of the gneisses as small aggregates of crystals or in hornblende-rich mafic bands, is an important constituent of the gneisses only in certain areas in which hornblende-biotite gneisses are generally more abundant and mafic banding more obvious. An attempt has been made to map out such variations with the results shown in fig:3.2 in which regions to the south and south-east, aroun Loch Maaruig and in the north were seen- to have a greater frequency of hornblende-biotite gneisses and mafic bands. The map itself was produced by plotting field observations and sample details which were then contoured by making estimates of the predominance of one lithology over another; when there was little to choose between them a 'neutral zone' (ie. of mixed lithology) was outlined. As discussed below this distribution of lithologies suggests the preservation of original compositional variations in the early complex and correlates with the results of the regional geochemical study described in section C.

72

P pP P\ P

P P Pp p P P IF P / Q PP Rp, P pQp Q_ R P PP- P P p PP

-P P- P' P P- P F t p

p p P Pi P P ?

P P P PPP P P P R PP PP ft. P pp P 4)s p p p Abundantt-- pegs, p 0 PP and S P p - P p small gronriites~ P PP S pPP P P PP P 5 5 P p IIPP C p pP Distribution or granitic rocks P Granites/granite gneisses O V - Pegmatite, 20% and over v 00 Boundary of max. granitic rocks wr er Boundary of Tarbert complex

i=ig:3.1 The distribution of granitic rocks and pegmatites Scale is approx. 1" to one mile.

73 Fig:3.2.T Distribution of gneiss types

regions of predominant hornblende-gneiss

(intermediate regions mixed more or less equally)

regions of predominant biotite-gneiss

74 3.3 Granitic rocks

Fig:3.l shows the present exposures of granitic rocks and pegmatites to be concentrated in a north- south belt in the western half of the area. Small granitic bodies are quite common in the north of this belt but the most intensive development of granitic rocks is seen at Tarbert. Here a core of granite and granite gneisses is flanked by pegmatite-rich acid gneisses (cf. Dearnley, 1962), in places the gneisses are left as 'rafts' in rocks whose pegmatite content is some 80 or 90%. Smaller granite bodies occur within the flanks of the complex. Interpretation of the outcrop- topography relationships shows the form of these granitic rocks to be that of an irregular dome covered by acid gneisses which, only a short vertical distance from the granitic rocks, show surprisingly little effects of their proximity to the complex apart from the presence of some coarse, irregular pegmatites. in the mountains of Clisham and Tomnaval, within the area of flat-lying gneisses described in Chapter 2, lie sheets of granitic rocks which are particularly well exposed in the corrie wall on the south side of Clisham. They form a broad outcrop on the west flank of the hills (figs3.l) and are composed of granite gneisses and coarse pegmatites. Outside the main belt of granitic rocks small areas in which pegmatites are abundant occur in three or four localities. From the general features of the distribution of granitic rocks it seems that an irregular 'surface of migmatisation' exists at shallow depths under the acid gneisses, local swells and domes in such a surface giving rise to the local pegmatite-rich areas and granite gneisses shown on the map. The form of this underlying complex is thus similar, though smaller in scale, to the dome of granites and migmatites described by Myers (1968) in west North Harris.

75 3.4 Mineral assemblages

In view of the relatively simple mineralogy and absence of obvious metamorphic reactions between phases it is intended simply to give a brief account of each mineral, together with the few analyses made on hornblendes. and feldspar, and to end with a discussion of the variations in modal composition.

3.4.1 Hornblende

Deep green, occasionally green-brown in colour, hornblende frequently occurs as large, well-formed crystals aligned in the foliation, or as clusters of small grains, or as scattered porphyroblasts. When concentrated it makes up the more mafic bands of the gneisses. When strained the mineral fractures and iron oxide is exsolved (fig:3.3). r~ Hornblende was analysed by electron-microprobe in three samples the analyses being given in table 3.1 and graphically i n the A 1 4 v. ( Na + K) plot of f i g : 3.4 . The relationship between hornblende and biotite is discussed in the following section.

3.4.2 Biotite

Biotite occurs in all gneisses in amounts varying between 10 and 25%. It has a .variety of forms, occuring as laths which define a strong foliation and are either scattered, concentrated in bands or occur as stringers around feldspar porphyroblasts. it is pleochroic from pale to dark yellow-brown. Inclusions are uncommon and consist of occasional iron oxides or quartz stringers along the cleavage.

The possible age relations between biotite and hornblende are obscure. Modal compositions suggest an inverse relationship between the two which would suggest a reaction between them. Evidence for such a reaction is, however, slight. The photomicrograph of fig:3.5 shows biotite enclosing flecks of hornblende

76 316 258 256 blot hblnd hblnd plag hblnd plag SiO2 37.12 42.50 42.57 62.04 42.44 62.13 TiO2 3.57 1.11 1.19 - .97 - A1 203 17.59 11.77 11.31 24.22 11.16 25.21 Fe0 19.70 20.48 19.19 - 19.86 - Mn0 .14 .29 .31 - .29 - Mg0 9.89 7.71 8.66 - 8.63 - Ca0 - 11.78 11.81 5.45 11.64 5.97 Na20 - 1.13 1.09 8.50 .99 8.32 K20 9.48 1.48 1.33 .20 1.37 .16 Cr205 - - .06 - .05 - Total 97.50 98.26 97.51 100.40 97.39 101.79 Si__" 6.01 6.39 6.78 10.96 6.78 10.84 Ti .44 .13 .14 - .12 - Al 3.36 2.21 2.12 5.04 2.10 5.19 Fe 2.67 2.72 2.56 - 2.66 - Mn .02 .01 .04 - .04 - Mg 2.38 1.83 2.05 - 2.06 - Ca - 2.01 2.01 1.03 1.99 1.12 Na - .35 .34 2.91 .31 2.81 K 1.96 .30 .27 .04 .28 .04 Cr - - .01 - .07 - 16.85 15.97 16.32 19.99 16.34 19.99 Ab% 73.07 70.95 An% 25.83 25.06 Or% 1.10 3.99

Table 3.1 Composition of hornblendes, plagioclase and biotite from three gneiss samples. Oxides given in weight percentages Formulae (program FERRIC): 24 oxygens- hornblende/biotite 32 oxygens- plagioclase

77 Tschermakite Pergasite 2.0

/ / / / / .. ~ -__,. / ,...-- . --•.., LO / -' I C Eden ite A1 4 / i / i atoms / / -'

0 Tremolite 0.5 1.0 (Na + K)atoms

Fig:3.4. Al v. (Na+K) plot of hornblende compositions.

78 (a) Biotite (secondary ?) enclosing hornblende and magnetite fragments.

hbind

biot

t hbind

blot

(b) Seeming reaction between biotite and hornblende, both involving the exsolution of magnetite fig.3.5 Possible biotite-hornblende interactions

79

while fig:3.Sb and c suggest that biotite and opaque minerals were produced from the hornblende which encloses them. Thus even the few cases of reaction between the two phases that are seen provide conflicting evidence. In the majority of samples the two minerals coexist with no evidence of reaction and, as is discussed below., it seems that chemistry is the chief control over the formation of hornblende gneisses. a

3.4.3 Plagioclase

Typically oligoclase and frequently anti-perthitic plagioclase forms a constant proportion of the rocks varying only between 42 and 45%. Gneisses whose plagio- clase is andesine occur in three areas: Ardvourlie in the north-east, Glen Trollamaaruig in the south-east and Bunaveneader in the south-west. All three areas are unusual in that they contain large and continuous

ark Scourie Dyke rocks and as such were classed as relatively low deformation areas in Chapter 2. Table 3.1 includes plagioclase analyses made in two samples. They have an average composition of Or:Ab:An = 1:72:27 with an Ab/An ratio of 2.8, values close to those obtained by optical methods.

3.4.4 Orthoclase and microcline

Potash feldspar is always subordinate to the plagioclase being generally only 5-10/ofthe modal comp- osition, and even in the granites only achieving a maximum of 20% of the total assemblage. Perthites are common in a variety of forms, often quite coarsely developed. Alteration and sericitisation are not frequent, except in gneisses in the extreme south-east of the area where low-grade retrogression is evidenced.

Microcline is seen in less than 10% of the samples and generally occurs in small grains as an accesory phase. Occasional large porphyroblasts are seen. Where microcline does occur the rock invariably exhibits a coarse'gneissose texture and the presence of the mineral seems to bear no relationship to the chemistry of the

80 rock in which it occurs. Its production seems to have been favoured in gneisses that did not suffer late Laxfordian cataclasis in regions of granite production.

3.4.5 Quartz

A ubiquitous phase, quartz tends to be rather over-

I looked but it forms 20-25% of the rock and exhibits a wide range of textural features varying from coarse grains with undulose extinction to much deformed grains or clusters of sub-grains, as described in section 3.5.

Accesory_phases

3.4.6 Pyroxene-

Diopside, rarely seen, occurs in gneisses in the south-east and east near Rhenigadale and on t'he west side of . In these rocks small rounded grains of diopside are scattered through the gneiss and show partial retrogression to amphibole. The thin. veins of pyroxene gneiss reported by Jehu and Craig (l931-) at Ardvourl ie were not found.

3.4.7 Epidote

A common accesory throughout the region, it becomes important only in the extreme south-east, in an area of low-grade retrogression. Cross-cutting veins of epidote occur in both gneisses and metabasites of this area. (cf. Myers, 1968) .

3.4.8 Allanite

Infrequent, as small red-brown grains with typical radiating cracks in.the surrounding feldspar. In the pegmatites it becomes a more common mineral.

3.4.9 Apatite

A common accesory, occasionally occuring in some abundance. Generally it forms small, rounded grains. 81 a

a Fig:3.6 Garnet in garnet-gneiss, Ceinn an Ora Quarry, Bunaveneader.

The garnet is chloritised along the fractures

Y~

a.

82 3.4.10 Iron ore

Although quite common as an exsolved phase in deformed ferromagnesian minerals, particularly hornblende, iron oxides are generally scarce as a seperate mineral species even as an accesory.

3.4.11 Garnet

Reddish almandine garnet is seen in only one

locality, a garnet gneiss (metasedimentary ?) in Ceinn an Ora quarry at Bunaveneader. The rock is a strongly banded hornblende-biotite gneiss in which the minerals are seen to be rather altered the garnets chloritised; and the feldspar sericitised (fig:3.6).

3.5 Textures of the gneisses

In thin section studies it becomes obvious that the minerals making up the gneisses vary in their reaction to deformation in a systematic way quartz being by far the most susceptible of all phases to deformation. Further, it was clear that using the features of the deformed quartzes one could sub-divide the textural features of the rocks into a relatively few groups which show systematic variations in distribution through the region. These divisions and their significance are now discussed below.

3.5.1 Textural types

The rocks may be subdivided on the following criteria: a) gneissose textures (fig:3.7a)- coarse grained equi- g ranular rocks in which the quartz shows undulose extinction while the other phases are undeformed. Microcline occurs only in rocks of this group, although it is not always present. In some examples the biotite forms stringers around the feldspar porphyroblasts, b) quartz develops one or other of two forms. In one (fig:3.7b) it forms long sinuous grains while in the

83 (a)Undulose extinction in large grains 7

4

I

(b) Elongate, sigmoidal quartzes with marginal/central sub-grains. Note position of the extinction bands

(c) Sub-grains

Fig:3.7 Textural features in quartz grains (see text).

84 other (fig:3.7c) the production of small sub-grains from the original crystal is seen, usually these two types are developed together, although strictly speaking they are produced by different processes in different conditions. As these textures develop and become more intenses the other phases become involved, with fracturing of hornblendes (and exsolution of iron ores), kinking and comminution of biotite and fracturing and recrystall- isation of the feldspar. c) in the most extreme form of deformation- that of the shear zone- all minerals become deformed and recrystall- ised and the quartz grains form long ribbons, far too large to have been produced by the deformation

4 of single crystals which suggests either coalescence of grains or grain growth during deformation. This texture is, by its very nature, locallised. Mylonitic gneiss generated by the Outer Hebrides Thrust show typical textures with pseudo- tachylyte veining. They represent cataclasis at a very late stage in the history of the region.

3.5.2 Distribution of textural types

The map of fig:3.8 shows the distribution of gneisses exhibiting gneissose (unshaded) and other textures and from it one can clearly see that the gneisses in the east of the region have predominantly gneissose texture while those in the west, in th a areas of granite and pegmatite production, in fact, exhibit the more deformed and varied textures of (b) above (shaded area). This marked correlation shows the extent to which the effects of late Laxfordian (F3) deformation was concentrated in the granitic areas while the gneisses outside these areas became at least partially recrystallised to give the coarser gneissose textures.

85 M

Fig:3.8 Distribution of gneissose and other textural types. Gneissose textures are developed in the unshaded region of the map,

86 Section B: Geochemistry of the gneisses

X-ray fluorescence analysis (see appendix A) was used to analyse for the major elements and a variety of trace elements (Rb, Sr, La, Zr, Ni, Ba and P) in 88 samples. The elements Th and Y were analysed for 27 of these samples, and major elements alone in a further 17 samples. The localities of these samples and full •analytical results are given in the appendices. It is worth stating clearly at this stage that the final quality of the analyses left a great deal to be desired in spite of repeated analyses and duplication of samples. It has since been discovered that this was due to problems of water absorbtion by the pressed glass disc a problem inherent in and uncorrected for in the method of preparation followed at Imperial College. For this reason not all data was used, the analyses being presented in the appendix being the final, accepted information. Further details of this problem are given in appendix A.

3.6 Sampling

Although the range of rock types and mineralogies is small their distribution is markedly heterogeneous on outcrop scale and sampling was a difficult task. Systematic sampling based on the grid system of the 1:10000 base maps was found to be impracticable, the regularity of the sampling being offset by natural obstacles (crags, lochs and so forth). A more random method was therefore necessarily employed in which samples were collected according to the degree of exposure and accesibilty from area to area. At each locality an attempt was made to collect a representative sample, a decision inevitably leading to bias as such a sample would invariably be an acid gneiss, the final choice then being between biotite or hornblende- biotite gneiss, or some similar decision. Such samples invariably contained clots and streaks of mafic material but further mafic gneisses were collected in order to asses their chemical features. 87 Sample size varied, being the result of a clash of interests between samples large enough to be represent- ative while being small enough to carry in some numbers. Careful/ choice of material provided something of an answer. A considerable number of samples were collected and many of these were analysed. The sheer number of samples collection of B involved results in a more representative material and, hopefully, thereby, more valid conclusions.

3.7 Aims of the geochemical study

A detailed geochemical stūdy of the grey gneisses was felt justified for several reasons; a) little geochemical data existed for the grey gneisses of the Outer Hebrides, although what little there is (eg. Skinner,1970; Sheraton, 1970 and Sheraton eLal, 1973) is frequently alluded to in the literature for the sake of comparisons. it was felt that a more systematic study would provide a body of useful data which would do more than supplement that already in existence. b) In the context of a regional study an attempt could be made to correlate gross iithological and petrological with geochemical trends. c) The possibilty of chemical variations between the gneisses of 'low' deformation zones and elsewhere could be investigated, and indeed some correlations could be made.

It has also been possible to make some comparison with geochemical data on the gneisses and granites of the Uig Hills thanks to analyses provided by Drs. D,Fettes and _ D.Smith of I.G.S. (Edinburgh) which are grtefully acknowledged. The actual data are not presented here but are used in many of the diagrams which follow.

88 3.8 General chemistry of the gneisses

In much of the discussion which follows the gneisses are regarded 'en masse' regardless of their mineralogical and field variations outlined in the previous sections. Variations in chemistry between the groups is introduced later in this section and discussed in greater detail in seperate sections below. r

3.8.1 Comparisons with other crustal rocks

The average compositions of several crustal rock types as estimated by Taylor (1964,1966) are given in table 3.2. From this data comparisons can be made betweeen the compositions of the North Harris gneisses and granites (tables 3.3 and 3.4) and 'typical' crustal material, granodiorites and granites. As can be seen the gneisses compare quite closely with a typical granodiorite in i2 terms of both their major and trace element chemistries, a classification which befits the position of the gneisses on the AFM diagram of fig:3.14, while the granites are almost 'typical' in their composition the chief discrep- ancies being those of Ba and Sr.

3.8.2 Average composition of the North Harris gneisses

The average compositions of the various gneiss types are given in tables 3.3 and 3.4. Differences between the groups are slight, the most striking being shown by the granitic and sheared gneisses and by the more basic gneisses._ The former show relatively high Si, K, Rb and Ba and low total Fe, Mg, Ca, P and Sr. Such variations are mirrored by the sheared gneisses where, however, Ba is lower and Sr and Na higher. Such variations are what one might expect in rocks whose chemistry has been affected by influx of the more mobile components of metamorphism and are discussed in more detail in section D. The more basic gneisses show features that are the inverse of those characterising the granitic and sheared

89 andesite crust grano- granite basalt diorite Si02 60.1 60.3 66.9 71.2 48.9

1102 .7 1.0 .6 .5 1.8 A1 203 17.2 15.6 15.7 14.7 15.7 Fe0 6.1 7.2 3.8 3.2 10.7 MgO 3.5 3.9 1.6 .6 8.7 CaO 7.1 5.8 3.6 2.0 10.8 Na20 3.3 3.2 3.8 3.5 2.3 1(20 1.3 2.5 3.1 4.2 .7

Ba 430 500 600 250 Sr 300 440 260 375

Zr " J 150 140 120 110 Cr 105 - 10 200 Rb 85 110 150 25 Ni 80 15 4 160 Y 33 35 40 25 Th 10 14 18 2 La 40 P 920

Table 3.2 Average compositions of common crustal rocks (from Taylor, 1966)

90 a, b. t-test F-test 5102 69.71 (4.8) 68,10 (2.6) * * Ti02 .38 (.16) .38 (.12)

A1203 15.23 (.83) 15.40 (•51) Fe203 1,95 (•65) 1.09 (.92) FeO 1.02 (.61) 2.20 (1.1) * )Ino .03 (.02) .05 (.02) *

MgO •78 (.33) 1.20 (.51) * t CaO 3.05 (.76) 3.95 (.64) * Na20 4.20 (..50) , 4.10 (..52) K20 2G40 (1.3) 1.80 (.49) * Total: 99.31 99.10 Sr 399 (99) 359 (ioo) Bb 85 ( 22) 7Ō ( 22) * La 34 (17) 26 (12) Zr 173 (45) 154 (25) * Ni 18 ( 9) 22 (12) Ba 681 (328) 624 (328) P 1342 (436) 1357 (486) Tb.. 6 ( 2) 6 (3) Y 6 (2) 8 (4) n•29 n-18

Table 3.3 Comparison between biotite gneiss (a.) and hornblende-biotite gneiss (b.) compositions. Major elements as percent oxides and trace elements in parts per million. The numbers in parentheses are standard deviations. In asterisk in either the t-test or F-test columns indicates a differenoe between the elements concerned to 99.95% significance.

90a a. b. c. d. 8102 71.44 (2.2) 70.44 (1.8) 69.31 (2.3) 64.63 (.91) TiO2 .29 (.11) .27 (.11) .34 (.09) .53 (.23) A1203 14.79 (.82) 15.59 (.60) 15.30 (.62) 15.43 (.74) Fe203 .96 (.63) 1.43 (.56) 1.24 (.63) 2.70 (1.5) Fe0 1.29'(.70) .86 (.34) 1.57 (.73) 3.36 (.61) MnO .02 (.01) .03 (.01) .04 (.02) .07 (.02) Mg0 i56 (.34) .50 (.36) .94 (.49) 1.77 (.39) Ca0 2.16 (.94) 2.83 (.70) 3.42 (.82) 4.62 (.57) Na20 3.44 (.27) 4.68 (.71) 4.20 (.46) 4.05 (.55) K20 3.99 (1.7) 2.81 (1.2) 2.12 (1.1) •1.58 (.21)

Total: 99.72 99.84 99.31 98.69

Sr 290 (90) 478 (229) 369 (79) 339 (112) Rb 150 (39) 87 (29) 79 (27) 62 (20) La 27 (6) 20 (14) 30 (13) 32 (15) Zr 160 (54) 139 (27) 161 (37) 135 (23) Ni 21 (14) 9 (4) 19 (9) 28 (14) Ba 854 (305) 576 (116) 632 (255) 506 (140) P 976 (407) 1054 (763) 1378 (405) 1346 (395) Th 8 (2) 6 (2) 6 (5) F 6 (1) 7 (2) 7 (1)

n=11 a= 7 n=18 a= 7

?able 3.4 Composition of various subsidiary gneiss types: a. granite gneisses b. sheared gneisses c. microcline-bearing gneisses d. 'low silica gneisses• (ie. with less than 65% Si02)

The numbers in parentheses are standard deviations.

90b rocks. Si, K, 8a and Rb are relatively low and total Fe, Mg, Ca and Ni higher, both with respect to the bulk of the gneisses. In keeping with their average composition these rocks are the only gneisses to show appreciable normative diopside, a feature typical of the more basic gneisses throughout the Lewisian.

3.8.3 K/Rb ratios a

It is now well documented that both amphibolite facies terrains and the 'average continental crust' are relatively enriched in Rb and K when compared to granulite terrains, and show lower K/Rb ratios (Heier and Thoreson, 1971 ; _Drury, 1974; S igh i nol f i , 1969, 1971) . Fig:3.9 shows the relationship of both K20 and Rb to silica (Si02) in the North Harris gneisses, The granitic rocks are obviously much enriched in both K and Rb relative to most of the gneisses but they do not differ markedly from the gneisses in K/Rb ratio (gneisses 272, granites 309) as is discussed below.(section 0). A major work on K/Rb ratios was presented by Shaw (1968) in which he established three trends: a) a 'Main Trend' of K/Rb = 200-300 along which the majority of rocks fall (MT in fig:3.10) b) a high K/Rb trend of oceanic tholei ites (0T) c) a low K/Rb trend of pegmatitic and hydrothermal rocks (PH). Following Shaw's methods and plotting log Rb against log K% for North Harris gneisses and granitic rocks (fig:3.11) shows that they cluster on the main trend with an average K/Rb ratio of some 250. In the compilation diagram of fig:3.12 the Uig rocks are compared to the North Harris gneisses and granites. As can be seen the Uig gneisses plot on the main trend but the granitic rocks extend off along the low ratio pegmatite-hydrothermal field. In the aplogranites (see section 0) the average K/Rb ratio of 75 which is very low indeed. Also on this diagram is shown the granulite field of high K/Rb ratios, comparison with which serves to emphasise that the K/Rb ratios of the North Harris rocks are typical of those of the amphibolite facies.

91 200 t

• gneisses + granitic rocks

ppm Rb

100-

r

060 ?0 80 % Si02

60 ?0 80 % Si02

Fig:3.9 Relationship of 1C20 and Rb to S102 in North Harris gneisses (The symbols are used in all such diagrams)

92 10

MT

.01

.001 2 t 1.0 10 100 1000 ppm Rb Fig :3, 10 Scheme of K/Rb ratios according to Shaw (1968). (See text)

Fig:3.11 K/Rb plot for North Harris gneisses and granites (point$ and crosses). The dashed line encloses the ratios of basic and ultrabasic rocks from the region

93 i 1

_%

10 100 1000 ppm Rb Fig:3.12 Compilation diagram showing the X/Rb ratios of gneisses (c) and granites (Gr) for north Harris- thick lines- and the Dig Hills- thin lines. 'i' indicates the field of porphyritia and aplogranitos from the Uig Hills. Typical Lewisian granulites are shown by the dashed line marked •Granulite' (from Lambert, it a1 1976).

94 Various authors have suggested mineralogical control of the K/Rb ratio in metamorphic rocks (eg Collerson, 1975; Shaw, 1968) indicating possible influences of biotite, hornblende and plagioclase. In fig:3.18 several ratios- including K/Rb- are plotted against modal hornblende, biotite and feldspar in the gneisses and the correlation of K/Rb with biotite and hornblende is a striking feature, the ratio exhibiting no such s .relationship with feldspar.

3.8.4 Variation diagrams

Figures:3.13, 3.14, and 3.15 show the variations in chemistry of the North Harris gneisses on AFM, CKN and normative feldspar digrams respectively. Data for the Uig rocks (represented by the solid line) are pre- sented for comparison. The gneisses are shown as dots and the granites by crosses in these and further diagrams. The AFM diagram shows all gneisses to have typically calc-alkaline affinities, the rocks falling along the granite-granodiorite section of such a trend. The CKN plot, as expected, shows a strong division between the gneisses and the granitic rocks due to the overall increase of K20 in the latter. The range of the distribution of granitic rocks in the diagram is created by the irregular correlation of K20 and Na2- 0, while K20 ne g;ltive, and Ca0 show strong positi=ve correlation (see fig:3.25). This division between the gneisses and granites Is mirrored in the normative feldspar diagram, and is again due to the higher K20 of the granitic rocks. From this diagram the average normative Ab:An ratio of the gneisses is approximately 69:31 (Ab/An= 2.2) while the actual composition is Ab:An= 73:27 (Ab/An= 2.7). This discrep- ancy is due to the fact that all available K20 is calculated as orthoclase in the CIPW norm whereas, in reality, some is incorporated in biotite thereby affecting the Ab/An ratio.

95 R

. • .

• + . • • •

. • . .• • •

. • ;+..

• Fig:3.13 AFM diagram North Harris gneisses and granites gneisses granites + Data from the Uig Hills (IGS data, unpublished) is shown in outline.

96 t

~z

Fig:3.14 CKN diagram North Harris gneisses and granites Symbols as in fig~3.13

97 Fig:3.15 Normative feldspar diagram North Harris gneisses and granites Symbols as in fig.3.13

98 3.8.5 Geochemical evidence for the origin of the gneisses

It was stated above that the average composition of the gneisses of North Harris was close to that of granod-, iorite and that when plotted in the AFM diagram they follow a 'typical' talc-alkaline trend. The problem exists, however, of whether this necessarily implies derivation by metamorphism of an equivalent suite of • . purely igneous rocks or whether a mixed assemblage of igneous and sedimentary rocks was involved. Lack of much obviously metasedimentary material in the region renders impossible resolution of the problem by field observation alone. Bowes (1971) studied the granulite facies gneisses of the •Kylescu Group near Scourie on the Scottish Mainland. Analysing 55 samples representative of the gneisses he compared them to Archaean volcanic rocks described by Baragar and Goodwin (1969) from the Superior and Slave provinces of the Canadian Shield. To make the comparison he plotted both major and trace elements against a differentiation index first suggested by Larsen (1938). The original index was calculated as 1/3Si02 + K20 -(Ca0 + Mg0 + Fe0) but for the work of Baragar and Bowes (and the present author) iron is not included in the calculation. Although Bowes' diagrams are not given here his conclusion was that "The chemical composition of the pyroxene and hornblende granulites of the Kylescu Group indicates that these rocks form an igneous suite or part of an igneous suite", and again ".. the granulites are interpreted as representing a metamorphosed volcanic assemblage." He goes on to suggest basalts, andesites dacites and rhyolites, or their pyroclastic equivalents, as the original members of the suite. The data could equally well refer to the plutonic equivalents of such rocks such as was suggested by Holland and Lambert (1975). The North Harris gneisses would only correspond to the more acid portion of such a sequence and, in the absence of recognisable metasedimentary or metavolcanic rocks would seem likely to be metamorphosed plutonic rocks. 99 Fig:3.16 shows the major elements (as weight percent oxides) and selected trace elements of North Harris gneisses and granites plotted against the modified Larsen index while fig:3.17 does the same for the Uig rocks (major elements only). A:decrease in mafic element concentrations and increase in Si02, K20, and Rb with respect to increasing Larsen index is evident in both sets of data. Again, the data from the two sets of rocks are closely comparable although the North Harris gneisses incorporate slightly more basic gneisses and hence have some data points with lower indices. That the trends reflect igneous features is suggested by comparisons with similar plots of actual igneous series (eg Larsen, 1931) and it would seem that the diagrams can best be interpreted on that basis. Two points must,°- however, be borne in mind: - a) the possibility that some sedimentary or volcanic rocks were incorporated in the North Harris gneisses remains an open question b) as will be described in _Chapter 4 where similar plots are employed (ie: elements versus some form of di fferen- tiaion index) metamorphism can sometimes be shown to obliterate original igneous trends rather than preserve or reinforce them. Caution is therefore called for in the interpretation of such diagrams for metamorphic assemblages.

3.8.6 Chemistry of the biotite and hornblende-biotite gne i sses

Having described the main variations of gneiss types and outlined.the general variations in their chemistry it is now opportune to consider the geochemical distinctions between the two chief groups of gneisses in North Harris, the biotite gneisses and the hornblende-biotite gneisses. The average compositions of the two groups are given in Table 3.3, together with the results of two simple statistical tests used in an attempt to determine whether any significant differences exist between them. An asterisk in either the student's-t or F-test column signifies a difference between the groups for that particular element to a minimum 99.5% confidence level. 10 •

• ' 74 • • • + + 4 + • . 4. 72 •

• • + • :•. • • 70 • • • •• •. • • • • : ,F • • • + 68 . • • • • • . - • • 66

• • • • • .64 • • • Si02% •

• 6 • • Ti02 9~

• • • • • •• • .4 . -. •• • • .• •. ••• • 4 • • •• • •;• • • • • ~ • • • • . ++ • + .2 • + + 4

17 • A1 203 q •• • •• 16 a • • •.•.-F . ••• 1. + • •.•• • • • .••. . + • 15 • • •• • • + + 14

13

• • • • . Fe203 • . 2 • • •• + .• ; • •• •• + • • • • • • • • • • . • • 4 + • 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

1 /3Si + K -(Ca + Mg)

Fig:3.16 Variation diagrams for North Harris gneisses and granites; oxides plotted against a modified Larsen Index.

5

4 - Fe0 % 3 • • •• • • • + - y y y 2 , •• .•• • • • , • + T + ♦. • ••♦•• _ • y

2.5 •• • 2.0 % Mg 0 q • • 1.0 •••••:• •+ • • • + • •• • +•/F 4 + t + +; + - • • • 5 • ,. • 4 - C a 0 % ....•. .•

• ..•+4$. • . • - • . 3 ♦• •, • •• •.+ y y •• + + + 4- 2 L yy y • T + + + +

5.0 • ' • Na20 % r- • • , •••• •;, • . • + ♦ + • + 4.0 • + • + + + + • + • • • + + 3.0 6 + t - • # 5 _

• ++ • + 3 •• ••..• + •.+ .•• . . 2 _ .. • •: .• • . • .• • • • • •.•, •; • • • , • •. .• •••♦+ ••• 1 1( 20 % - I . 1 t ) l 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

Fig:3.16 continued 102 200 :- + + 1 60 + • 120 + + .•• • .. 4 . 80 • .- • . • . • . • •••. . •

•• . . . 40 . Rb .

50

• . 40 Ni .. • . 30

20 • • i 10

b~ 1400

. _ • 8a 1200

+ +

• . . 1000 + I.

800

.=r •

. . 600 + . . 400

.

. 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

Fig:3.16 continued Trace elements (in ppm) 103 0O M

• + ' •} • • • o •'•• • O A O w O'r 0. •. 4 • O • Y , ao ;• • ū 4 i N • •ti • • f

'0N

i • • • • N • • • • • • 4 °• • ••• • ° • • • • • • • • • N • • • • • , N

• • • • • ° • °° • •• A • • • • • • • • • • •• •• •• ON • • • • • •

• • • • •

M N O tn O O U' M ? [V — to .7 M N — 0 •D u1 N O N N

• gne i sses- •granites

O M

.. .. . '• • • O O •• °• •• O_cv S N M • — •- ♦ • O

•.'~ • • s • • t • •

I. • • •

• • • • • • • •• •• ° • • i• ° ° • N ~ • • • • - • • • N

• • • • • • • •• • • .° • • • • • • • • O N • • • • • • • • •

• • • • '

• • • •

'.0 • •• . • • • I • , , • . • • , , !• ° . , , • M . a •O .o•O 'O ~ '.0 N N .o

Fig:3.i7 Variation diagrams for gneisses and granites from the Uig Hills (data provided by I.G.S., unpublished) Oxides plotted against a modified Larsen Index.ndex.-

104

Student's-t was obtained by the standard formula:

t- X1 - X2 . sp 1 + 1 n1 n2

2 with sp== (n1 -1).S1 + (n2-1).S22

I nl + n2 - 2

S = standard deviation X = mean n number of samples subscripts 1 and 2 indicate sample populations

The value of t so obtained is checked in tables for the desired confidence level. The F-test is applied to the sample variance (standard deviation, squared) and is defined as: »g

F = (S1 ) where S1 is the larger variance (S2)

Again, the value of F is compared to values in tables, obtained at specific confidence levels; if the value is not significant there is no evidence to suggest that the samples are drawn from two populations with differing variances.

Student's-t suggests differences in the two groups for the elements: Si02, MnO, MgO, CaO, K20 and Rb while the F-test established significant variation in: Si02, FeO, K20 and Zr

Using these results Section C, below, attempts to correlate regional variations in geochemistry to the gross distribution of lithologies described earlier. Such contrasts between biotite and hornblende- biotite are to be expected on the basis of data from geochemical work on other Lewisian gneisses. For example Sheraton (1970, 1973) presents analyses of hornblende and biotite gneisses suggesting differences in Fe, Mg, Ca and Cr (greater in the hornblende gneisses) and Si, K, Rb, Zr and Ba (all reduced).

The relationships between mineralogy and chemistry were studied within each group using a correlation program (GCOR, Imperial College Computer Library). Data for the two groups were subjected to interelement corr- elation and the results are given in Table 3.5. • The intention in this study was to compare the correlations in each group and relate the differences in these correlations to variations in mineralogy of the two gneiss types. Thus, for example, the presence of hornblende would seem to be associated with the correlation between Ti and Fe, Mn and Ca, features absent in the biotite gneisses. The results, however, are rather ambiguous due to the wide range of substitutions possible in the ferro- magnesian minerals (see, for example, Moxham 1965).

A further correlation between mineralogy and chemistry, and this time a more profitable one, was shown between modal mineralogy and various element ratios (fig:3.18). In this diagram the modal percentages of hornblende, biotite and feldspar are plotted against K/Rb, Rb/Sr Ba/Rb and K/Ca. As may be seen the ferromagnesian minerals exercise control over all the ratios while they appear to be fairly constant in the feldspar. K/Ca shows only a strong negative correlation with hornblende. The existence of these relationships leads to the inclusion of these ratios in the regional study of Section C.

Finally, an attempt was made to correlate the modal proportions of the various minerals directly to composition but without success, a result possibly due to the relatively small number of modal analyses available (28).

106 Hornblende-gneisses Biotite-gneisses ( n a 19) ( n 29) Si (-) Ti, Fe, Mn, Mg, Ca Si (-) Ti, Fe, Mg, Ca, Na Ti (+) Fe, Mn, Mg, Ca Ti (+) Mg Fe3+ (+) Mg Al (+) Ca, Na Fe2+ (+) Mn Fe2+ (+) Mg Mn (+) Mg, Ca Mn (+) Ca Mg (+) Ca Mg (+) Ca, (-) K Ca (+) Na, (-) K Na (-) K Ni (+) Fe Sr (+) Ca, Na, (-) K Ba (-) Ca Rb (+) K Ba (+) K Zr (+) Ti ~F P (+) Fe, Mn, Mg, Ca

Table 3.5 Interelement correlations in hornblende and biotite gneisses. Only a summary of the correlation matrix is presented here, showing the nature of the correlation (+ or -) for values of correlation at 99.99% significance.

107 20 2k/Rb Lorob1.ad•

k/Rb r♦ Rb/Sr • Rb/Sr borab1 n d. 10. •.. •.' • • . • i i • .

10 10

600

X/IIb bistits 20 400 Ds/Rb biotit.

Rb/Sr btoUt• es/rb - • . x/Rb .4 Rb/Sr O 10 • • 2o0 • . • • • - S .R • • • • .

10 20 30 1d 20 10 20

600

[/IIb fsldspsr 1.0

400 [/Cs borabl.ad.

E/Rb •• .4 - Rb/Sr feldspar • • • x/C+ •• 200 Rb/Sr • • • . .2- •

~ SO 60 40 So Fig:3.18 Relationships of various element ratios to modal hornblende, biotite and feldspar in gneisses 3.9 Comparisons with other Lewisian gneisses

Having established the overall geochemical features of the North Harris gneisses comparison can now be made with gneisses of other areas, both in the Outer Hebrides and on the mainland. Data used for comparative purposes are given in Tables 3.6 and 3.7. a

3.9.1 The Uig Hills (IGS data)

Using student's-t and the F-test described earlier- the results of which are shown in Table 3.6- it may be seen that differences exist in the Si02, MgO and CaO the North Harris gneisses being, apparently, somewhat more basic in overall composition. (The differences in CaO appear to be shown systematically in all analytical data of the two sources- ie, gneisses, granites and basic rocks- and it is therefore believed that these differences are due to analytical procedure). To all intents and purposes the gneisses correlate closely in their major elements, a feature which comes as no surprise when one considers the overlap of the two in the variation diagrams. The trace element concentrations, however, differ quite markedly between the two regions most being present in much higher concentrations in the Uig rocks (excluding Ni and P), see Table 3.6. Such constant variation would suggest that the environment in which the Uig gneisses were metamorphosed differed considerably from that in North Harris, a difference which seems due to the position of the gneisses in a region of large scale granite production.

3.9.2 Other Outer Hebrides gneisses

Skinner (1970) working in the Outer Hebrides analy- sed only four samples from east North Harris and a further • 22 from Lewis and Harris. His results are given in Table 3.7 (averages from his PhD thesis). In both major and trace element concentrations the analyses of grey gneisses closely with those of east North Harris but with slightly lower total iron .and higher Sr and Ba. a. b. t-test F-test S102 69.08 (2.51) 68.12 (2.6) • TiO2 .38 (.14) .34 (.11) £1203 15.31 (.73) 15.23 (.71) Fe203 :1.03' (.77) .82 (.42) • • Fe0 1.81 (.83) 2.21 (.75) Ma0 .04 (.02) .05 (.02) MgO .93 (.46) 1.40 (.66) * • CO 3.40 (.84) 3.31 (.95) • Na20 4.16 (.50) 4.33 (.47) K20 2.15 (1%1) 2.38 (1.1) Total: 99.32 98.30

Sr 383 (101) 634 (220) • • Rb 79 (25) 113 (52) • • La 31 (16) 73 (12) * • 4 163 (39) - Ni 20 (11) 27 (18) • Ra 658 (287) 930 (513) P 1357 (436) 1114 (326) • • Tb 7 (3) T 6 (4) 9 (5) Cr - 64 (33) n=64 n=21

Table 3.6 Comparison between the gneisses of North Farris '(a.) and the Uig Hills (b.). Numbers in parentheses are standard deviations. An asterisk in either the t-test or F-test columns indicates a significant difference for that element (99.5%)

109a a. b. c, d. e.

Si02 68.27 67.58 68.23 68.22 64.9 TiO2 ..21 • .33 .33 .34 .43 A1203 14.96 15.19 14.98 16.04 16.0 Fe203 1.48 1.76 1.61 1.94 2.24 FeO 1.16 1.28 1.25 1.47 2.05 Mn0 .04 .05 '.04 .04 .05 MgO 1.00 1.28 1.19 1.44 1.8 Ca0 3.58 3.22 2.57 3018 3.39 Na20 3.96 4.15 3.80 4.90 4.2 K20 2.68 2.58 3.73 2.09 2.28 Total: 97.41 97.63 97.83 99.66 97.34 Sr 444 487 419 580 382 ( Rb 61 I 75 141 74 85 La 32 26 Zr 135 185 221 193 169 Ni 10 19 13 20 35 Ba 802 829 870 713 626 P 746 1134 1364 1473 1039 Th 9 7 6 11 10 Y 8 5 6 7 7 n= 3 n=22 n=18 n=39 n=26

Table 3.7 Average composition of amphibolite facies gneissest a. North Harris b.Lewis and Barris c.South Harris migmatite complex (a,b, and c from Skinner,1970) d. Gneisses from the Laxfordian complex, Rhiconich (Sheraton,1973) e.Amphibolite facies gneiss, Coil and Tiree (Drury,1974)

110 Comparison with the gneisses from the migmatite complex of South Harris analysed by Skinner shows that the biotite gneisses of North Harris somewhat resemble them in composition while the hornblende-biotite gneisses have higher total Fe, Mg and Ca. The trace elements correlate quite closely apart from Rb, Ba and Th which are all higher in the migmatites.

•3.9.3 Mainland gneisses

An overall comparison shows the North Harris gneisses to have a chemistry which is typical of amphibolite facies Lewisian gneisses. Fig:3.19 shows several diagrams in which the granulite facies gneisses of Coll and Tiree (Drury, 1974) are compared to the gneisses and granites of North Harris.• The latter occupy the field. in which amphibolitised granulites also plot and as such it is impossible to determine whether or not the North Harris rocks were once granulites.

Comparisons with the average composition of Laxfo- rdian gneisses from the mainland shows the North Harris rocks to be similar in both major and trace element chemistry (differing markedly in only Sr) to rocks from the type area at Bridge.

Section C: Regional trends in geochemistry

As discussed above lithological and mineralogical variations exist in the gneisses, chief amongst them bEing the distribution of hornblende-biotite gneisses and the occurence of granites and pegmatites. The geochemical•evidence already outlined reveals CA% Ee re•nce5 subtle but significant1 between biotite and hornbiende- biotite gneisses and suggests various relationships between mineralogy and chemistry. Having thus established such variations an attempt to correlate them became necessary. To do this the chemistry was examined on a regional basis and the

111

10 +

0 00 • ~O •0 K~ 0

10 30 50 70 90 110 K/Ba

a 60

0

40 0 o 0 Ba/Rb 20 . • •• ;.:• '= + .: + + i 0

1.0 10 100 1000 Rb ( ppm) 1 og .

1.0

.75 +

Rb /Sr .50

.25 . o. O0• o 0

0 10 100 1000 Rb ( ppm) 1 og .

Fig:3.19 Comparison of North Harris gneisses (.) and granites (+) with granulite facies gneisses of Coll and Tiree (o) (After Drury, 1974). 112 20 15 Th ppm 10 • • •• '0 • • ••••0 5 •• • o. 0 " •• 0 0 • oao 0 .". it '" 0 1000 .,. • , 0 • 0 .. Sr.·ppm • 0 500 • ' . • • .... ., .. ~...... ~.:. ~~. • t .. ..- ...... :,. •+ •• • + 0 .4 ." ·0 • 0 .3 • • ., P20S% • • . 2 ·0, • "...., 0 0 ...... ;. ~:.. . • 1 I:··.... ~. :: .- • 'l. • ... _ ". + • + +.- ~ 0 200 400 600 800 1000 K/Rb

Fig:3.19 continued

113 .; distribution of the various element concentrations and ratios compared with the lithological and mineralogical distributions. Trend surface analysis was used to . obtain the geochemical trends and some aspects of this technique are therefore described before. turning to an interpretation of the results.

3.10 Trend surface analysis . (See Davis, 1973, from which the following is taken) As trend surface analysis is discussed in several textbooks and papers only an introduction to the method will be given here. The computer program used in the analysis was KW1KR8 written°by Esler etal (1968) and reported in the Kansas Geological Survey Computer Contributions Bulletin No. 28.

3.10.1 Method

Trend surface analysis is used to establish trends in spatially arranged data, be that data chemical or otherwise. Regional patterns may be established in which local fluctuations are smoothed-over, or the method can be used to detect local fluctuations on the regional pattern, this latter being dependant on the availability and distribution of data. In this work it was desired that local effects be contoured-over leaving a regional trend that could, perhaps, be interpreted with respect to mineralogical variations and so on. Fig:3.20 (from Davis, 1973) illustrates this concept of regional trend and local variation. in all cases the heavy line indicates the regional trend while the local deviations from that trend produce positive and negative residuals. As can be seen, the more complex the regional trend becomes the better it fits the data until, theoretically at least, it fits the data exactly and the residuals are lost. To estimate a regional trend multiple regression analysis is carried-out on the data, each observation being fitted to a polynomial function in which the geographical coordinates are an integral part. For

114 a~

(a) (b)

(C) (d) F 1 g : 3 . 20 Concept of trend illustrated to two dimensions. (a) Collection of original data points and the line on which they lie. (b) Straight-tine trend fit to the observations. (c) Parabolic trend. (d) Cubic trend. Shadings repre- sent positive and negative residuals from the trends.

(From Davis, 1973) .

115 example a linear trend surface is represented by an equation such as:

ybo + 1 + b2X2

in which the observation, y, is regarded as a linear function of a constant value (bo related to the mean of the data) plus an EW coordinate, b1 , and a NS coordinate, b2. The three unknowns necessitate three simultaneous equations the solution to which gives the coefficients of the best-fitting linear trend surface, best-fit being determined by least squares as in regression analysis.. program.KWIKR8 is one such program which deals with one, two and three-dimensional data (ie. graphs, maps and block diagrams) and will determine the coeff- icients of trend surfaces up to the seventh degree, it produces line printer output listing, as desired, statistical data, maps of the original data points and residual values, contoured maps of the trend surface and residuals, etc.

3.10.2 Statistical tests of trends

Output from KWIKR8 includes a variety of statistical coefficients used to estimate the value of the trend surface. These are: a) total variation in the data (the sums of squares) b) mean and standard deviation of the data c) variation explained by the surface (as a percentage of the total variation) d) coefficient of correlation (typical "''r' of regression analysis) e) the F-ratio and degrees of freedom between the regression and the residuals f) the coefficients of the polynomials describing both the regression and the residuals Using a combination of these data it is possible to see how far a particular surface explains the variation in the data and the significance of such a correlation.

116 An important test is concerned with whether or not surfaces of succesively higher degrees yield succesively greater significance in the analysis. This is a problem discussed by Chayes (1970) who decided that, in most cases, only low order surfaces should be used as, frequently, higher order trends are not significantly different from lower ones and succeed only in producing more complex contour maps. In preference to Chayes' method, but employed for the same reasons, Davis' (1973) test was applied to some of the surfaces produced by KWIKR8. The test involves the following procedure: a) finding the difference in the sums of squares due to regression of the higher polynomial minus that of the lower b) di-viding this difference by the difference in regression degrees of freedom, giving the mean square of the regression c) dividing this mean square by the mean square due to derivation from the higher polynomial d) If the resulting P-value is insignificant (determined by tables) nothing has been gained by fitting the higher degree polynomial. In general it was found that little significance could be attached to the higher order surfaces and hence, generally, only 3rd and 4th order surfaces have been used. These orders were usually the first to show any significance at all (determined by the regression coefficient, r) in the trend surfaces.

3.10.3 Problems in trend surface analysis

As already mentioned Chayes suggested that errors in trend surface analysis are not generally guarded against. The main sources of error are therefore outlined: 4 a) It has to be assumed that samples are collected with out bias from, ideally, a normally distributed populat- ion. Neither assumption can be tested. b) The number of observations should be as large as possible and as an absolute minimum should exceed the number of coefficients in the polynomial equation (up to 36 in a seventh degree surface; all maps are based on a

117 minimum of 60 data points) or the results are invalid. Equally statistical tests cannot be faithfully applied in small samples. c) The lack of data points at map boundaries can create edge effects in which extrapolated values can become enormous. it is good practise to have a 'buffer-zone' at the edge of the map created by the presence of data in excess of the map area. This is even more important If sample numbers are low and the map area large. d) A well scattered arrangement of data points, preferably random and unclustered, will produce more acceptable results. Sample localities for the trend surface analysis are given in fig:3.21.

3.11 Geochemical distributions in Worth Harris

The results of the trend surface analysis, applied to the elements and element ratios which were earlier shown to differ between the biotite and hornblende- biotite gneisses are given in fig:3.22. Each diagram includes a title giving the element concerned, the degree of the surface employed, a correlation coefficient (r) and the percentage of the total variation explained by the regression (%VER). The table below shows the anticipated variations in chemistry of the hornblende-biotite gneisses with respect to the biotite gneisses:

Hornblende biotite gneiss Biotite gneiss

Mn0 Si02 MgO greater than K20 greater than FeO biot. gneiss► Rb hbind—biot gneiss CaO Zr

K/Rb Rb/Sr , greater than lower than Bey/Rb biot.gneiss K/Ca hbind—blot gneiss

Possible lower Fe/Mg in biotite gneisses

From the distribution maps (figs:3.l, 3.2 and. 3.22) and this table of variations it can be seen that the

118 • 136 .135

318. 317 256 316. 338 • 333 • 26. 60. .332 63 • 58. 36.E 250 • .263 55 • .54 44. .244 •261 .53

15 .45 363 • 74 'ō3 .73 128 • •127 83. .129 126 .120 .150 .238 240 . .239 .90 140. 113. 117. .305 215. .I14 .115 . 242 140 . • 96 284••7 .163 233. .209 236. .273 274. .290 .268 .156 153.

Fig:3.21 Sample localities for use in trend surface analysis

119 Si02 K 2 0

4th degree surface 3rd degree surface

r= .56 %VER= 32 r .58 %VER= 33

Fig:3.22 Trend surfaces of selected elements Some statistical information is given with each map: r correlation coefficient %VER- percentage of total variation explained by the regression Oxides in wt% Trace elements in ppm.

120

Fe 0 Fe203

3rd degree surface 3rd degree surface

r- %VER- 19 r- .36 %VER= 1

Mn0 MgO

3rd degree surface 3rd degree surface

r- %VER- 11 %VER- 15

FIg:3.22 continued 121

Caa Rb

3rd degree surface 3rd degree surface

r= .38 %VER= 15 r= .57 %VER= 32

Zr Fe1Mg

3rd degree surface 3rd degree surface

r- .47 %VER• 22 r= .33 %VER" 11

Fig:3.22 continued 123

K/Rb Rb/Sr

3rd degree surface 3rd degree surface

r== .57 AfER 32 r= .57 %VER- 37

K/Ca 3a/Rb

3rd degree surface 3rd degree surface

r• .56 %VER= 31 rd .61 %V ER= 37

Ffg:3.22 continued

124 elements MnO, Mg0 and 'total' Fe correlate quite closely with the region of hornblende-biotite gneisses but that there is only weak correlation of S102. K20 and Rb relate more strongly to the region of granitic rocks, particularly that of Tarbert, than to the distribution of gneiss types. Ca0 and Zr show no correlation. Of the element ratios Ba/Rb and Rb/Sr show a fair correlation, K/Ca a weak correlation and K/Rb an inverse relationship with the regions of hornblende-gneisses. The granitic rocks of the south exercise a considerable influence on the Ba/Rb, Rb/Sr and K/Ca ratios.

At this point it must be added that, although not presented here, trend surfaces were drawn for all elements and a common feature of many of them was a strong tendency to a NE-SW orientation of their variations, a feature similar to that of the mineralogical distribution and markedly discordant to the structural trend (NW-SE). TiO2, A1 203, P and Ni all exhibit this trend. Of the other elements Na and Sr (and to some extent also Ba) show some mutual correlation but no strong trend, while La seems to be utterly random in its distribution.

3.12 Discussion and conclusions

Correlation between gross lithological distributions and geochemical variations is thus quite marked (with the exceptions of Si-02 and the K/Rb ratio) but the cause of such distributions is open to some debate. Estimates of the P/T conditions during the main phase of Laxfordian metamorphism, based on the metam- orphic assemblages of the Scourie Dykes, show conditions to have been quite uniform throughout the region (see Chapter 5) and it is not possible, therefore, to M postulate varying metamorphic conditions as a cause of the lithological and geochemical variations. In addition there exists little evidence of reaction between biotite and hornblende to suggest that hornblende was produced at slightly higher grade than biotite- although such a reaction is suggested by their inverse' relationship in

125 the modal analyses; see section 3.4). Furthermore it is difficult to envisage a metamorphic process which could operate on such a scale, metasomatism being regarded as unlikely (at least in the Laxfordian episodes) as the Scourie Dyke compositions do not show the regional variations one would expect had such mass migration of material occured. It would seem, therefore, that the fundamental cause of the distributions lies in the early history of the complex and that- unless large scale metasomatic processes are envisaged during Scourian metamorphism- the likliest source is that of original lithological variations, possibly as some basement-cover sequence although the absence of much recognisable metasedimentary or metavolcanic rocks in the area leads to this being only a tentative suggestion. The zone of granitic rocks, discussed in section D below, does not relate to the early E-W trend but does affect the geochemical trends (especially in K20 and Rb). The zone-appears to have been established by metasomatic processes but the period at which it was established is debatable. It is obviously superimposed on the E-W trend which must, therefore, be older but the zone of volatile-rich gneisses and granitic rocks could have been produced in a late Scourian episode (as was suggested by Myers, 1968) or as a purely Laxfordian feature. Its existence prior to the main phase of Laxfordian deform- ation (F2) and its subsequent influence on Laxfordian metamorphic and tectonic history suggests that the belt was developed in late Scourian times and suffered 'remobilisation' at various stages of Laxfordian history, particularly with the phase of granite and pegmatite production later in the period.

126 Section D: The granitic rocks

As described above,and shown in fig:3.1, granites and granite gneisses occupy a north-south belt in the west of the region. The main areas of granitic rocks lie in the mountains of Clisham and Tomnaval and at Tarbert. The form of these bodies and the general distribution of the granitic rocks suggests the existence of a region of granitic rocks at shallow depths under North Harris. If the suggestion of Myers (1968) is correct these granitic rocks could well have been formed in the Scour ian and been reactivated by Laxfordian events. This may, in fact, be indicated by the regional variations of lithology and geochemistry as described above (see section 3.12). Ge ochemical data exists on the granitic rocks of North Harris (this work), the South Harris migmatites (Skinner, 1970) and the Uig Hills (unpublished IGS data). Full data for the North Harris rocks are given in the appendix and Tables 3.4, 3.7 and 3.8 include average analyses of all three regions.

3.13 General chemistry of the North Harris granites

In section 3.8.1 it was shown that the granitic rocks of North Harris compare very closely with the 'typical' granite suggested by Taylor (1964, 1966), differing only in the concentrations of Th and Y both of which are much lower in the Lewisian granite gneisses. Comparison with granitic rocks elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides produces similar close- correlations. Data for the migmatites of South Harris (Skinner, 1970) show that in almost all elements, bar Si02 and Rb which are lower and MgO and Sr which are higher, the granitic rocks of South Harris are of the same composition as the North Harris rocks. Turning to the Uig Hills, however, one finds that while the major elements show strong similarities, with the exception of K20 which is higher in Uig rocks, almost all the trace elements are at variance to concentrations in the North Harris

127 Granites Porphyritic gas Aplogranites

Si02 70.95 (1.9) 71.34 (1.3) 75.13 (.70) TiO2 .29 (.11) .33 (.07) .05 (.03) A1203 14.29 (.55) 14.31 (.53) 13.53 (.41) Fe203 .79 (.26) .98 (.20) .61 (.21) Fe0 1.47 (.47) 1.45 (.21) .38 (.23) MnO .03 (.01) .04 (.01) .04 (.05) Mg0 .52 (.15) .54 (.09) .17 (.05) Ca0 1.51 (.41) 1.56 (.16) ' 1.01 (.16) Na20 3.40 (.48) 3.55 (.19) 3.86 (.42) K20 5.30 (1.1) ' 5.14 (.19) 4.38 (.49) Total: 98.63 99.33 99.68

Sr 277 357 94 Rb 323 401. 535 La 117 92 21 Ni 2 6 ' 3 Ba 1290 . 1359 325 P 876 957 264 Y 7 11 9 Cr 36 39 53 . , na39 na 8 nal2

Table 3.9_ Average compositions of granitic rocks, Uig hills. (unpublished data, I.G.S.) samples- Sr and P are similar; Rb,La,and Ba are substant- ially higher and Ni lower for the Wig granites. Related granitic rocks of the Wigs develop even more aberrant chemistries (Table 3.8) as was mentioned in section 3.8.3 and is further discussed below.

All the North Harris granitic rocks, and for that matter. most of the gneisses as well, have greater than 80% normative quartz and feldspar making them suitable for comparison with the experimental data in the system- Si02- KAISi308- NaAISi308- CaAl2Si208 investigated by Tuttle and Bowen (1958). On this basis both the North Harris and Wig granites are plotted in the quartz-a.lbite-orthoclase and normative feldspar diagrams (figs23.23 and 3.24), both of which are discussed below ( section 3.1k).

Fig:3.25 shows the relationships between K20, Na20 and CaO and Rb, Sr and Ba in the North Harris rocks. A strong negative correlation exists between K20 and CaO but the relationship between Na20 and K20 is more or less random; thus the granites plot rather irregularly on the CKN diagram of fig3.15. Rb shows an expected positive correlation with K20 and hence is probably concentrated in potash feldspar while Sr correlates with Na20 and CaO, suggesting concentration in plagioclase. Ba shows little correlat- ion with any of the major elements.

3.14 Chemical evidence for the origin of the granitic - rocks

From the triangular diagrams of figs:3.23 and 3.24 it can be seen that the North Harris granitic rocks fall. within both the composition field of the gneisses and that of 'typical granites'. Such a distribution is directly related to the formation of the granitic rocks by metasomatism and recrystallisation of the host gneisses, with the production of new mineral phases, principally potash feldspar. Comparisons between the average compositions of the granites and the gneisses

129 Fig:3.23 Qtz-Ab-Or diagram North Harris gneisses and granites. A Symbols as in fig:3.13 { Tuttle and Bowen's (1958) max. concentration of granites and minimum melting point curve are also shown.

130 Fig:3,24 Normativefeldspardiagram' Kleeman's thermaltroughisalso shcwn. Symbols asinfig:3.13 North Harrisgneissesandgranites. 131

K 1eeman 's 6 • 4 • •• • %K20 • o e •• 2 •

2 4 % CaO % Na20 2 4 6

; • •

• • • - •• 4 • % 20 • • - • 2 • Rb Ba Sr i t t t t / t _ 100 200 500 1000 1500 200 400

CaO • a •• • • • o~ • o

Rb ' - Ba • ~' • Sr

100 200 500 1000 1500 200 400

4 S % Na20 : •

Rb Ba Sr

t t ■ t 1 t 1 t 4 100 200 500 1000 1 O0 200 400 Fig:3.25 Variation bet een X20, CaOC Na20, Pb, Sr, and Ba in the granitic rocks of North Harris. All trace elements in p.p.m.

132 show that S102, K20, Rb and Ba are introduced with.a consequent reduction of CaO, MgO, total Fe and Sr.

That partial melting with extensive metasomatism and element migration in some 'disperse phase' has not occured is suggested by the K/Rb ratios (section 3.8.3) which, although both K20 and Rb are greater in absolute amounts in these rocks (fig:3.9), is identical to that of the gneisses. Had a melt phase been involved a variation in the ratio would be expected. In fact comp- arison with data from the granitic rocks of the Uig Hills (fig:3.12) shows that the K/Rb ratios in these rocks are considerably lower and that many of the granites fall onto Shaw's pegmatitic-hydrothermal trend indicating their derivation by partial melting.

Of importance in this connection is the variation in water contents of the gneisses (estimated as volatile loss on ignition during XRF preparations) shown, cont- oured using trend surface analysis, in fig:3.26. From this map one can see a relatively high volatile content in the south and west, a distribution which coincides quite strongly with the distribution of granitic rocks. Such correlation may be explained as being due to: a) the presnce of an earlier, volatile-rich zone of granites prior to Laxfordian reworking (as was suggested by Myers_(i968) and above), or b) the presence of a volatile-rich zone, produced either by Scourian or Laxfordian events, which facilitated the production and emplacement of late Laxfordian granitic material: Whichever of these is, in fact, correct the relat- ively high volatile contents (and hence greater PH2O) had great affect on the production/remobilisation of granitic rocks, the style and degree of deformation suffered by these regions and, as is described in Chapter 4, the mineral assemblages of basic rocks with- in such zones. (see Chapter 6)

133 Fig:3.26 Contoured distribution of volatile contents in the g neisses. 4th degree trend surface, explaining 51% of the total variation. r= .38

134 Referring again to the triangular diagrams of figs:3.23 and 3,24, data for the North Harris granites are plotted with that of the Uig Hills for comparison. In the Qtz-Or-Ab diagram Tuttle and Bowen's (1958) maximum distribution of granites and minimum melting- point curve are shown, while the normative feldspar diagram incorporates Kleeman's (1965) thermal trough. North Harris granites fall within the field of the gneisses and, with increasing normative orthoclase (K20) into the field of 'typical' granites. The data from the Uig Hills, on the other hand, show a clear-cut distinction between the data of the gneisses and that of the granitic rocks with the latter clustering around the field of typical granites and lying well within Kleeman's thermal trough, - The interpretation of these diagrams based on Bowes' (1967) observations agrees with the model postulated to explain the variations of the K/Rb ratios, the Uig granitic rocks involving partial melts and intrusion ( the parnutochthonous and Intrusive granites of Bowes) , the rocks of North Harris being 'in situ' ('autochthonous) phenomena.

In figs:3,16 and 3.17 the major and trace element data of the granites and gneisses from North Harris were plotted with repect to a modified Larsen index. As can be seen from these diagrams the granites of North Harris fall along much the same trend as the gnēisses whereas the trend of the Uig granites is markedly different to that of the gneisses, a feature which is taken as emphasising the suggested differences in the methods by which the granitic rocks were produced in the two regions.

136 Section E: General conclusions a) Field observations show the gneisses to be a relatively simple group of rocks consisting of dominant acid gneisses and localised, subordinate granitic rocks. Basic and metasedimentary gneisses are rare. b) On a mineralogical basis th e gneisses fall into biotite and hornblende-biotite types. Gross variations exist in the distribution of the two types which may be mapped-out. c) Granitic rocks occupy a north-south belt in the west of the region with two areas in which granite production is at a maximum. d) The_simple amphibolite facies mineralogy shows little evidence of reaction between phases, although such reactions between biotite and hornblende are suggested by their inverse relationship in modal analyses. e) The grey gneisses can be subdivided on textural grounds into gneissose and more deformed types, the distribution of which indicates that later Laxfordian deformation was concentrated in the regions of granitic rocks. f) The chemistry of the gneisses approximates closely to that of a typical granodiorite; the granitic rocks are 'typical' granites. They all fall generally onto a calc-alkali trend in AFM plots. g) K/Rb ratios are particularly interesting as they suggest that in ail rocks of the region the ratio (and, by inference the chemistry in general) is controlled by the metamorphism to which the rocks were subjected. h) The origins of the gneiss complex are difficult to determine. Attempts to define precursors on the basis of chemistry is difficult and of dubious value. i) Distinct chemical differences exist between biotit and hornblende-biotite gneisses which allow correlation of regional patterns in chemistry with the distribution of gneiss types. Both seem related to pre-existing lithological variations in the early complex. The region of granitic rocks exerts some influence on certain element distributions.

137 j) The granites show evidence both in the field and in their chemistry of having been produced by 'in situ' metasomatism and recrystallisation of the host gneisses. The granites may have been produced originally in late Scourian episodes. k).Volatlie contents of the gneisses show variations which correlate markedly with the distribution of granitic rocks. It may be that this volatile-rich zone was the Scourian feature which led to the production of granitic rocks solely in the Laxfordian.

138 Chapter ~+

The basic and ultrabasic rocks of the complex

'There is nothing more frightful than ignorance in action' Goethe

139 Chapter 4

Contents

introduction 142 Section A: Petrology

4.1 Introduction 144 4.1.1 Basic rocks (a) Amphibolites (b) Noritic rocks 4.1.2 Ultrabasic rocks 4.1.3 Age relations

4.2 Amphibolites 146 4.2.1 Field relations 4.2.2 Petrology

4.3 Noritic rocks 154 4.3.1 Field relations 4.3.2 Petrology

4.4 Ultrabasic rocks of the Maaruig complex 158 4.4.1 Field relations 4.4.2 Petrology

4.5 Ultrabasic rocks south of Tarbert 161 4.5.1 Field relations 4.5.2 Petrology 4.5.3 Comparison with the Maaruig complex

4.6 Miscellaneous ultrabasic rocks 166 4.6.1 Peridotite 4.6.2 Highly altered rocks Section 8: General geochemistry

4.7 Comparative geochemistry 167

4.8 Geochemical classification 173 4.9 Tectonic environment: the use of geochemical

discrimination diagrams 177

4.10 Metamorphic geochemistry 179

4.11 Summary 184

140 Section C: Geochemistry of selected basic and ultrabasic rocks 4.12 The noritic and associated rocks of Ardvourlie 1$5 4.12.1 Field relations 4.12.2 Petrology and mineral chemistry 4.12.3 Whole rock chemistry 4.13 Ultrabasic rocks of the Maaruig complex 191 4.13.1 Petrology and mineral chemistry 4.13.2 Whole rock geochemistry 4.13.3 The structure of the complex Section 0: Pet rogenes i s 4.14 'The story so far' 200 4.15 Igneous history 201 4.15,1 Pearce plot analysis 4.15.2 interpretation (a) Ferromagnesian minerals (b) Plagioclase (c) Other phases 4.15.3 Application to the rocks of North Harris (a) The Maaruig ultrabasic rocks (b) Noritic rocks (c) Amphibolites 4.15.4 Summary 4.16 Metamorphic history 216 4.16.1 Regional considerations 4.16.2 Metamorphic assemblages Section E: General conclusions 223

141 Chapter 4

Introduction

Throughout the region the gneisses contain numerous deformed and metamorphosed basic and ultrabasic rocks the distribution of which is shown in fig:4.1. Many of the features shown by these rocks in the field- such as folding, boudinage and so on- have been described in Chapter 2 and the present chapter, therefore, deals primarily with the petrological and geochemical features of the rocks. Their mineral chemistry, although referred to in this section, is dealt with as a specific topic in Chapter 5. In an attempt to avoid undue repetition of infor- mation the structure of the chapter is somewhat complex (see also the contents list): Section A concerns the petrology of all rock types. A division of the rocks into amphibolites, norites and ultrabasics is made and their various mineral assemb- lages.and textures described. Section B deals with the general features of the geo- chemistry of the rocks taken as a whole and also introduces some of the distinctive features of each rock group. Section C gives detailed accounts of the mineral and whole rock chemistry of the noritic rocks and the Maaruig ultrabasic complex. Certain aspects of the mineral chemistry of these rocks are discussed here rather than in Chapter 5. Section D concerns the petrogenetic aspects of the rocks. Use is made of the whole rock chemistry to determine the original igneous assemblages of each group, a study which leads to the conclusion that the 'Scourie Dykes' of North Harris incorporate two suites of rocks, those with clinopyroxene and those with orthopyroxene in their original assemblages. The metamorphic features of the rocks are discussed in an attempt to define the possible controlling factors in the production of the range of assemblages shown by the basic rocks, and the general PIT conditions of their metamorphism. 142

• • • • • •

General distribution of the basic rocks U- Ultrabasic rocks N- noritic rocks H- hornblende granulites All other rocks are the various types of amphibolites •

♦ •• • •• • ▪ • •'\ ' •• s • • • •. • •• •

• • • . .••~ ..t•• • • • '•. • • • • • • • - • •

• • • • • •• s • • t .• • • H . _`_ •-. U • Z• Z .✓ • • , ••..." v

c ...... ; - .. ...• ‘ •t•. • • •.' .. ` ... .` _ ."mir \‘

. ♦••,\,r+ • • . .• _=• • • ••. ••.•▪ • • • • • .• • .• . V` •. • . \` ~ •.•~;. • • • • Fig:11.1 Arr f 1 Scx e. Ul~~ rOx = fv612

143 Section E gives a summary of the most important conclusions of the earlier sections.

Section A: Petrology

4.1 Introduction

The rocks described in this chapter fall naturally into two groups- the basic rocks and amphibolites and the ultrabasic rocks, of which the former are the more abundant. Further subdivisions on the basis of mineral assemblage or locality can be made, but, in an effort to avoid repetition of descriptive material, such div- isions are kept as simple as possible the basic rocks being divided into amphibolites on the one hand and rocks with relict igneous features on the other while the ultrabasic rocks are dealt with according to locality.

4.1.1 Basic rocks a) Amphibolites

These are rocks whose mineral assemblages and textures are almost wholly metamorphic; they are further subdivided into 'simple' amphibolites (hornblende-plagioclase) and one (clinopyroxene) or two (plus orthopyroxene) pyroxene amphibolites, all of which may also contain garnet. Texturally variable they range from coarse meta- gabbroic rocks to fine grained amphibolites. They are invariably foliated and may be mineralogically banded. The typical amphibolite of the region is a clinopyroxene-amphibolite; however, in the Tarbert area, simple amphibolites predominate- a feature seemingly related to the relatively high water content of the gneisses in that area (see section D).

144 b) Noritic rocks

Rocks with apparently igneous mineralogy and texture occur in the east and north-east of the region. They are noritic in character and appear little altered by metam- orphism, though they pass laterally into amphibolites. They are described in this section and in sections C and D.

Li 12 Ultrabasic rocks

The ultrabasic rocks occur as scattered outcrops in each of which the character of the rocks is distinctive This absence of correlation between Qutcrops results in their being divided according to locality. They may be divided into: a) opx-olivine-chromite rocks (harzburgites) of the Maaruig complex b) opx-olivine-spinel-amphibole rocks of a large sheared and altered lens a mile south of Tarbert c) miscellaneous deformed and altered rocks in a number of localities, mainly in the SW of the region.

4.1.3 Age relations

The relative ages of these rocks .are rather difficult to assess for; while all are deformed by Laxfordian tectonic episodes and thus pre-date them, their age relative to Scourian events is less easy to determine. Nevertheless the field evidence described in Chapter 2 shows that the early gneiss complex contained thin basic layers, pods and agmatites which contribute to the foliation cut by the Scourie Dykes. Amphibolites of this type are petrologically very similar to those derived from Scourie Dykes and as cross-cutting relationships are rare, the age of many of the smaller bodies cannot be determined. in the ultrabasic rocks the Maaruig complex seems likely to belong to the Scourie Dyke suite since it shows very limited metamorphic effects, but in the absence of any transitional ultrabasic-basic sequence no direct comparisons can be made with the petrology

145 and chemistry of the basic members of the suite in this area. In section D the Maaruig rocks are linked on geo- chemical grounds with the noritic rocks mentioned above, the whole group being regarded as a sporadically developed and separate suite of intrusions contemporaneous with the other intrusions of the Scourie Dykes. The sheared and altered ultrabasic rocks south of Tarbert are texturally, mineralogically and chemically distinct from the Maaruig rocks and it is thought that they represent much earlier ultrabasic material intruded into the Scourian complex at an early stage of its development. The problem of age rel āt i ons is referred to again in section D when all the petrological and geochemical data has been presented. More detailed descriptions of the petrology of these various groups now follows.

4.2 Amphibolites

4.2.1 Field relations

Amphibolites occur throughout the region in bands and lenses varying from centimetres to tens of metres in thickness and length. As may be seen in fig:4.1 some of the larger units outline structures traceable for several kilometres. As many of the structural features of these rocks have been described in Chapter 2 only a brief summary of the salient points is given here: a) Intrusive contacts with the gneisses are rare, the basic bands being generally concordant with and an integral part of the gneiss fabric and structure. b) The rocks occur as lenses and boudins, thin relatively continuous sheets and as fold structures on all scales from centimetres to kilometres. c) Foliation is common and mineralogical banding may also be present. Not uncommonly the margins of these rocks are sheared and foliated while the core remains massive and often coarse grained. In some cases garnet clots form in the core in preference to the foliated margins; such features are not confined solely to large outcrops.

146 d) In the west and south of the region few large basic units exist and it may well be that Laxfordian deform- ation was greater in those areas. The higher volatile contents of the gneisses in these regions (Chapter 3) may have influenced the degree and style of deformation, and seems to have _led to the predominant development of simple amphibolites in the Tarbert area (see below). e) The occurence of large folded bands of basic rocks, together with the preservation of some original igneous features has been used to define areas of relatively, low Laxfordian strain.

4,2.2 Petrology

Āmphibolites make up the majority of the basic rocks of the region, are fine to medium grained and generally foliated. In some a coarse texture is seen in which clots of mafic minerals set in a feldspar matrix give the rock a speckled appearance. Where the feldspar retains the original lath-like shapes of the original igneous rock this texture is described as 'sub-ophitic' (as in the igneous sense). Other speckled textures are due to metamorphism rather than mimetic preservation of an original igneous texture (see 4.12.1). Garnet occurs in amphibol,ltes throughout the region, generally as small scattered crystals. In some rocks the garnet shows conversion to plagioclase-clinopyroxene aggregates, which in some cases completely pseudomorph the original garnet (fig:4.2). In some instances this retrogression can be related to the development of pegmatitic rocks in the area concerned (as is the case in the area in which fig:4.2 occurs). In some outcrops layering is recognised which may be either purely metamorphic in origin- such as the feld- spathic layer in foliated amphibolite, fig:4.3b- or is possibly a preserved igneous feature- such as that of fig:4.3a?

147 Fig:4.2 Garnet being pseudomorphed by pyroxene/plagioclase aggregates, Rhenigadale.

t

148 (a) Plagioclase-rich layers- original?

(b) Grain size variations- metamorphic? fig:4.3 Layering in amphibolites

149 Mineral assemblages observed in the amphibolites are:

Plag + hblnd + opq ± gnt + qtz Plag + hblnd + cpx + opq + gnt + qtz Plag + hblnd + cpx + opx + opq + gnt + qtz

A common accesory is apatite, sometimes in considerable abundance. Of these assemblages the first two are the most common, clinopyroxene-amphibolite being widespread and simple amphibolites tending to be predominant only in the Tarbert area. The twp-pyroxene amphibolites may be divided on a textural basis into two groups: a) coarse textured types of much the same appearance as the other amphibolites b) 'hornblende-granulites', fine grained and evenly textured (fig:4.4); the texture is clean-cut and shows no indication of alteration or mineral reactions. The plagioclase is untwinned and frequently exhibits triple- point junctions. Rocks of this type are uncommon and occur only in the east and north-east of the region. Dearnley (1962) suggested that such assemblages were evidence of an early Laxfordian granulite facies meta- morphism of regional extent, a suggestion discussed in section D.

Hornblende is typically dark green with green to green- brown pleochroism, and varies from coarse, well-formed crystals to the somewhat granular form of the hornblende- granulites. It frequently contains exsolved iron oxide (fig:4.5), particularly in the more deformed rocks. The mineral occasionally forms hornblende-rich bands, but more frequently produces various mottled effects with the feldspar.

The plagioclase (andesine-oligoclase) may occur as laths representing the original texture, but more usually has been deformed and recrystallised. Twinning is common except in the hornblende-granulites where the plagioclase

150 Fig:4.4 Hornblende granulite. Note two pyroxenes, granular minerals and plagioclase triple- points (latter are arrowed).

J

Fig:4.5 Exsolved iron oxide in deformed hornblende

151 is more calcic (andesine), untwinned and exhibits triple- point junctions, In highly deformed rocks the feldspar exhibits bending and fracturing of the twin lamellae. Alteration along fractures is common but clouding of the feldspar is rare.

Garnet usually occurs as scattered crystals or as clusters, faintly pink to reddish, generally free of inclusions and lacking obvious zoning. In some rocks garnet is retrogressed to aggregates of plagioclase and pyroxene. More rarely, garnet forms large irregular grains sieved with inclusions. In these samples the rocks may have suffered late-stage hydrothermal effects, for scapolite is a_common accesory phase in rocks with such garnets.

The pyroxenes generally occur as granular minerals, often clustering with other mafics. Clinopyroxene is salite (Chapter 5), pale blue-green in colour and ubiquitous in amphibolites outside the Tarbert area. It is likely that at least some of the mineral in such rocks represents recrystallised original igneous pyroxene, for in section D it is suggested on the basis of whole rock chemistry that the original mineralogy of these rocks was that of clinopyroxene and plagioclase. From thin sections, however, it is difficult to show whether such recrystallised clinopyroxene is shown. Obvious secondary clinopyroxene is seen in association with retrogressed garnets. In fact garnet and clino- pyroxene (and plagioclase) seem to be directly related for, in the hornblende-granulites which contain garnet modal clinopyroxene and plagioclase are present in smaller amounts than in the non-garnetiferous types. Orthopyroxene (hypersthene, En 42-47) is less common than clinopyroxene- possibly due to its absence in the original assemblage- but nonetheless is to be found in assemblages throughout the region. Generally very pale in colour it is never of greater importance than clinopyroxene (with the exception of a sample of hornblende-granulite in which it forms 14% of a total pyroxene content of 25%).

152 Quartz is seen chiefly in the more altered and deformed rocks and is a common phase in the simple amphibolites (as an accesory). It is generally present only as an accesory mineral and is absent, also, from most of the normative compositions. Potash feldspar, usually sericitised and altered, is only of importance in rocks affected by adjacent granites and pegmatites- particularly those of the Tarbert area- suggesting some metasomatic affect. Biotite occurs as an accesory, generally as dark brown flakes. Magnetite and ilmenite occur as scattered grains, clusters with mafic minerals or as exsoived phases in hornblende. Other accesories are apatite (quite common and occasionally abundant), scapolite, calcite, epidote and chlorite all chiefly as alteration products of the other phases.

Although little remains of the original igneous assemblages in these rocks a scheme of metamorphic reactions can be established based partly on the suggestion made in section D that the original assemblage incorporated plagioclase and clinopyroxene, and using thin section studies. On geochemical rather than petrological grounds it seems that much of the clinopyroxene in these rocks represents the recrystal'lised original mineral which, together with recrystallised feldspar and new amphibole make up the clinopyroxene-amphibolites. The loss of the pyroxene leads to the formation of 'simple' amphibolites (hornblende-plagioclase). In other rocks garnet was derived either directly from the igneous assemblages or via the development of an amphibolite at an early stage of metamorphism (section 4.16). Subsequent retrogression of garnet to pyroxene-plagioclase aggregates occurs locally, correlated to late Laxfordian pegmatite development (fig:4.2). Orthopyroxene is regarded as being entirely metamorphic in the amphibolites., its' restricted occurence being due to its absence in the original assemblage. The development of these various assemblages is _further discussed in section D.

153 4.3 Noritic rocks

4.3.1 Field relations

Rocks with this assemblage are rare, occuring in only two localities- the large mass just south of Ardvourlie in the north-east and in smaller outcrops on Straiaval. Those of the former were extensively sampled and analysed, the results being described in section C. In - this unit a core of noritic rocks grades into foliated amphibolites, suffering in the process extensive mineralogical, chemical and textural changes. The noritic rocks of Straiaval occur as both isolated lenses and as the cores of foliated amphibolites. It seems likely that these two occurences of these rocks were derived from one or only a few such intrusions.

4.3.2 Petrology

The noritic rocks are massive, unfoliated and contain well preserved relict igneous minerals and textures. The orthopyroxenes form large euhedral crystals set between laths of plagioclase, but due to the dark colour of the feldspars a speckled effect is not produced. The typical assemblage, incorporating as it does the metamorphic minerals, is:

Opx +' p 1 ag + amph ± gnt + opq

in the more retrogressed varieties the amount of amphibole increases and biotite appears as an accesory phase.

Orthopyroxene (bronzite, En 72-76), forming some 50% of the assemblage, occurs as large euhedral crystals (fig:4.6). Fine exsolution lamellae are occasionally evidenced and in some samples twinning is preserved. The mineral is brown, variations in the colour density being often very regular and suggestive of zoning. However, traverses across analysed crystals show little or no evidence of zoning and colour variations may also be quite irregular. It is possible that an original

154 i (a)Prismatic orthopyroxene, colour zoned and with small marginal amphibole grains.

(b)Preserved twinning in orthopyroxene (x—polars).

\

(c) Orthopyroxene being replaced by amphibole. Fig:4.6 Features of the noritic orthopyroxenes

155 zonation has been obliterated by metamorphism and recry- stallisation leaving only the colour zoning. Around the margins of the orthopyroxenes of the more deformed rocks small sub-grains of orthopyroxene are developed with no evidence of alteration although it is likely that later conversion to amphibole is facilitated by the process. Within the crystals fractures cross-cut the cleavages and along such fractures minor amphibole and other alteration products are developed, growth of these phases being parallel to the cleavage. In all samples the orthopyroxene has suffered at least slight conversion to a pale green amphibole- although in the least altered samples such amphibole is less than 5%. Micro-probe analyses show this amphibole to vary in composition from a 'typical' hornblende to a more magnesium-rich pargasitic amphibole (see Chapter 5), this higher magnesium phase being typical of the more magnesian rocks of the region. As the degree of retrogression increases the amount of amphibole also increases until the orthopyroxene exists only as relicts, being almost completely pseudomorphed by aggregates of amphibole (fig:4.6). Reaction between the orthopyroxene and plagioclase generates two features: a) orthopyroxene-plagioclase intergrowths b) garnet-plagioclase-orthopyroxene coronas The orthopyroxene-plagioclase (fig:4.7) involve very fine-grained phases (which proved difficult to analyse) and are produced at orthopyroxene-plagioclase and plagioclase-plagioclase contacts. Both minerals have much the same composition as their larger bretheren, although the feldspar tends to be slightly less calcic. These intergrowths are seen in the least altered of rocks and are, in fact more common in such samples; this fact, together with the similarity of composition between phases suggests that they owe their origin to the igneous rather than metamorphic processes that have affected these rocks. The garnet coronas are typically of the form of

156 (a) Garnet-plagioclase coronas around orthopyroxene

i

a

(b) Orthopyroxene-plagioclase intergrowths

Fig:4.7 Corona structures and mineral intergrowths in the noritic rocks.

157 fig:4.7b with orthopyroxene ringed by orthopyroxene- plagioclase intergrowths, the whole capped by an irregular ring of garnets, in some cases, however, the garnet rims the orthopyroxene directly. The garnet is virtually colourless and analysis shows it to be much more magnesium-rich than garnets of other basic rocks (almandine to pyrōpe of 4:l compared to 7:l)..a feature due to their derivation from the magnesium- rich pyroxene. These coronas are probably a purely metamorphic feature. In the least altered material plagioclase (labradorite-andesine) occurs as large laths between the orthopyroxene. It appears to be the original feldspar, having suffered little recrystallisation, and forms up to 35% of the assemblage. Twinning and antipethite are quite frequent. Recrystallisation causes a reduction of grain size and twinning and leads to some alteration and clouding. In the freshest material the composition varies from labradorite (66% An) to andesine-labradorite (53% An). On retrogression the plagioclase becomes progressively less calcic until, in the fully retrogressed and foliated rocks of the margins, the plagioclase is typically andesine-oligoc- lase. Ilmenite sometimes forms clusters of grains but the least altered rocks have less than 2% opaque. Biotite occurs as an accesory phase as small flakes, becoming more abundant in only the most altered rocks. Other accesories are epidote and, rarely, rutile. These rocks and their chemistry are further discussed in section C.

4.4 Ultrabasic rocks of the Maaruig complex

4.4.1 Field relations

The rocks of this complex occupy a synclinal structure plunging to the south-east, exposed along the north shore of Loch Magiruig. Exposure inland is poor and hence the precise structure and disposition of the

158 layering seen in the complex is unknown (see, however, section C). Contact with the gneiss on the eastern side is marked by shearing of the ultrabasic rocks at the contact and the occurence in the gneisses of lenses of both ultrabasic and basic rocks. Towards the centre -of the exposures a lens of gneiss is seen enclosed by the ultrabasic material, while the western contact is not exposed (see the map of fig:4.23). In section C the structure of the body is discussed in more detail using both mineral and whole rock chemistry to establish the probable sequence of rock ®ur types through] the complex and is shown to be rather more complex than that of a simple syncline.

4.4.2 Petrology

The rocks are dark grey-green, weathering brown, and consist of large bronzite crystals- up to lcm across- set in a finer grained matrix consisting chiefly of olivine. In some rocks the orthopyroxene is extremely large (up to 2 or 3cros) and sieved with olivines. Layering, evident in the field and thought to be primary, is not easily matched by variations in modal mineralogy but cryptic chemical variations occur throughout the sequence (section C) which can to some extent be correlated with the field observations. Occasional hornblende-rich bands and serpentinised horizons occur within the layering. Typical assemblages are:

Opx + oliv + chromite + amphibole Opx + oliv + chromite + amphibole + flsp oily + chromite + amphibole

The feldspar-bearing assemblage is seen only at the top of the sequence while the rocks lacking in orthopyroxene occur near the base, and are repeated through the exposures by folding (fig:4.23).

159 The orthopyroxene (bronzite, En 85-90) forms large euhedral crystals up to 2 or 3cms across (fig:4.8), brown in colour, cleaved and with numerous thin exsolution lamellae. In some rocks it forms 55-60% of the total assemblage. The largest crystals are seen near the base of the sequence where they are sieved with olivines. Smaller orthopyroxenes occur in the matrix and have the same composition as the larger crystals. Olivine and spinel are frequent inclusions and the overall appear- ance of the texture suggests initial precipitation of olivine and spinel followed by simultaneous crystalli- sation of all three phases. As in the orthopyroxenes of the noritic rocks colour_variations suggest zoning but, once again, traverses by micro-probe show no clear evidence of zoning. At cont- acts with olivine the orthopyroxene often exhibits a pale zone of 'alteration': however, with the exception of a slightly higher silica content, the composition is the same as that of the main crystal. At margins and along fractures the pyroxene alters to a pale green amphibole and it is somewhat tacitly assumed that all amphibole in these rocks is derived by secondary alteration of the pyroxene. Modal amphibole varies from 9-29% of the assemblage in the olivine- orthopyroxene rocks and up to 45-50% in the amphibole- rich layers, in which it may well be representative of a primary, igneous amphibole. The olivine is forsteritic (Fo 82-88) and occurs both as grains enclosed in orthopyroxene (fig:4.8) and as the 'matrix' mineral. It varies from 35% to 51% of the assemblage and has a reciprocal relationship with the pyroxene. Olivine suffers typical alteration along fractures with the production of serpentine and opaque. The mineral is never completely pseudomorphed by such alteration products (as are the olivines of the ultra- basic rocks south of Tarbert). Chromite occurs as scattered grains or clusters, forming between 2% and 7% of the rock. It is also enclosed by the pyroxene.

160 Plagioclase is seen in the topmost rocks of the sequence (fig:4.$) in which It forms 10-12% of the rock. It occurs as a highly irregular interstitial phase with extreme clouding which almost completely obscures the twinning. Analysis shows the mineral to be labradorite (An 56%) with a somewhat unusual composition containing 1.7% MgO, 1.2% FeO and .07% Cr205. Accesory minerals include biotite- rather scarce, deep brown in colour and kinked- and a red-brown spinel, both seen only in the feldspathic rock at the top of the sequence where both seem to be original phases.

4.5 Ultrabasic rocks south of Tarbert

4.5.1 field relations

To the south of Tarbert, in gneisses which contain a relatively high proportion of granitic material, are a series of small altered ultrabasic lenses. One of these, however, is some 50m long, altered and cut by shear zones, but which contains some relict minerals. Within the shears are pods of relatively unaltered rocks (fig:4.9). Exposure is poor and contact with the gneiss not visible. At the western edge of the body the contact is cut by a relatively fresh amphibolite (pōssibly a Scourie Dyke) which appears to have been emplaced after the alteration and deformation of the ultrabasic rocks. Along strike from this lens are lenses of thoroughly altered ultrabasic material, rich in hornblendes, extend- ing as far as the north shore of West Loch Tarbert.

4.5.2 Petrology

The rocks are for the most part 'hornblendites' (or at least made up of amphibole) but throughout the expos- ure olivine occurs as a relict phase and in the western portion orthopyroxene is also preserved. Such variations may indicate an original layering but alteration is so extreme that it is hard to say with certainty whether or not this is so. Fig:4.10 shows the general form of the

161 Fig :4.S Clouded, twinned interstitial plagioclase from ultrabasic rocks at the top of the Maaruig series. (x-polars)

162 (b)

Fig:4.9 Sheared rocks (a) and unmodified lenses (b) contained within them, ultrabasic rocks seen south of Tarbert.

163 /~,,;-. el ict olivine + opxn

Fiel ict olivine

S.

Gneisses. with pegmatite . and included UB tenses

UB rocks — Sheared UB Amphibolite (thought to be 'Scourie Dyke') * 4 Pegmatite 0 lOm r+ 4 The boundaries of the lens are not exposed

Fig:4.10 General form, lithology and mineralogy of the ultrabasic lens south of Tarbert.

164 lens and the arrangement of the rock types and shears. The assemblages exhibited are:

Opx + ol + amph + spinel ol + amph + spinel + opq amph + spine 1 + opq 'Serpentine is a common alteration product of the olivine.

Olivine (Fo78) occurs throughout the body forming a maximum of 20% of the assemblage. It forms small grains generally fractured and altered, in some cases becoming completely pseudomorphed by serpentine and opaque (particularly in the sheared rocks). Orthopyroxene (Bronzite, En$0). is seen only in the western half of the lens. It occurs either as large irregular crystals (up to Icm across), sieved with inclusions- chiefly olivine- or as rounded grains, similar in size to the olivine. Pinkish coloured and often quite strongly pleochroic, it shows no exsolution lamellae, colour variations or other such features so typical of the Maaruig rocks. In some rocks- perhaps surprisingly in those samples taken from lenses in the shears- it forms some 35% of the assemblage, but it is usually much less abundant. Alteration to a pale green amphibole is common but the question of whether the amphibole in these rocks is all secondary or mainly recrystallised igneous amphibole is hard to resolve. Although only a few amphibole analyses are available they fall into two classes, possibly suggesting that one is original and the other derived from the orthopyroxene (and is Mg-rich). In several examples, banding of amphibole-rich and orthopyroxene-olivine layers (on a scale of some 5mm) is exhibited, the most likely cause of such a feature being metamorphism. The spinets of these rocks are either magnetite, seen chiefly in the olivine-bearing rocks, or a green- black aluminous spinel ('hercynite').seen in the ortho- pyroxene-bearing rocks. Magnetite is also a common alteration product of olivine- particularly in the sheared rocks.

165 4.5.3 Comparison with the Maaruig Complex

From the descriptions of the two bodies given thus far it seems reasonable to suggest that the ultrabasic rocks of Maaruig and this body are unrelated. The degree of alteration and shearing; the variations in texture and the variations in composition of the constituent minerals all suggest that the rocks are quite distinct and it seems likely that the rocks of this body were derived from ultrabasic material emplaced in the early complex,

4.6 Miscellaneous ultrabasic rocks

4.6.i Peridotite

Peridotite, occuring in a small outcrop in Laxadale Burn was first described by Jehu and Craig (1934) and later by Myers (1968). A massive olivine-rich core (olivine 90%) is flanked by foliated rocks (olivine 50%) containing streaks of clinopyroxene and hornblende. The olivine of the margins suffers extensive alteration. This material is of uncertain affinity resembling neither the Maaruig nor Tarbert ultrabasics.

4.6.2 Highly altered rocks

In several localities much-altered rocks- now made up of tremolite-anthophyllite, actinolite and talc- form trains of lenses along strike, traceable for up to i00m. In one locality large forsteritic olivines and minor orthopyroxene occur as relict minerals in a talc-anthoph- yllite-calcite matrix. In another exposure pods of ultrabasic material show concentric zones of actinolite and hornblendite around a talc-amphibole core. Both these exposures seem related to the ultrabasics seen south of Tarbert.

166 Section B: General geochemistry

Major element analyses were carried out on 32 amph- ibolites, 10 noritic and related rocks, 8 ultrabasics from the Maariig complex and 5 from the body south of Tarbert. Trace element analyses (Rb, Sr, Cr, Ni, Zr, Ba and P) were made on the ultrabasic and noritic rocks and on some amphibolites. Of these 55 analyses 43 gave acceptable results and are presented in this work. Regrettably only one third of the analysed amphibolites were thin-sectioned, making it difficult to draw definite conclusions about such problems as the correlation bet- ween mineralogy and chemistry. It is intended in this section to present the geo- chemical data of all rock groups, comparing them with data on other Lewisian rocks and with possible modern equivalents. Their chemistry is used to classify them, to assess the use of various discrimination diagrams in assigning rocks to specific tectonic settings and to discuss aspects of their metamorphism. To conclude this section the main inferences that have been made are summarised.

4.7 Comparative geochemistry

Table 4.1 gives the average compositions and norms of the various rock groups of the region. The amphib- olites are undifferentiated due to lack of mineralogical data. The average composition of the amphibolites in the Uig Hills is also presented (unpublished data, IGS) and it may be seen that both groups of amphibolites are extremely similar in both their major and trace element concentrations, only Sr and Ni showing any real variation. The average composition of the noritic rocks is based on the samples taken from the rocks at Ardvourlie. As a group they show significant differences in MgO, FeO. (total iron), Ni, Cr, Ba and Rb when compared to the amphibolites. When the average compositions of the Maaruig and Tarbert ultrabasic rocks are compared the chief variations

167 Table 4.1 Averaged major and trace element analyses of the North Harris basic and ultrabasic rocks.

Data from the Uig Hills (IGS, unpublished) is included Several element ratios and CIPW norms are shown. The symbols used in the norm are those of Kelsey (Min.Mag. 1965)

Sample numbers are as follows: amphibolites n = 32 (9 trace) norites n = 4 Maaruig UB n = 6 Tarbert UB n = 3 (2 trace)

168 169

amphibs. norites Maaruig UB Tarbert UB Uigs ■ SiO2 50.15 50.82 45.47 47.64 50.1 TiO2 1.32 .37 .22 .81 1.5 A1 203 13.67 11.73 4.21 7.53 13.7 Fe203 4.04 2.16 3.45 3.27 3.4 Fe0 10.59 7.85 8.93 8.74 10.1 Mn0 .21 .16 .17 .19 .21 Mg0 6.43 15.14 31.83 20.38 6.0 Ca0 9.86 9.17 4.62 7.79 9.8 Na20 2.80 1.68 .64 2.31 2.6 K20 .83 .29 .21 .35 .80 P205 .10 .04 .03 .02 .13 Total 100.00 99.41 '99.78 99.03 98.45 Sr - 188 155 61 87 247 Rb 22 11 13 10 28 Zr 97 76 31 18 - Ni 163 296 1305 779 88 Ba 181 347 83 60 212 Cr 127 1843 6235 2313 138 K/Rb 359 500 162 350 800 Rb/Sr .12 .07 .21 .11 .11 K/Ba 44 16 25 58 38 Ba/Rb 8 32 6 6 8 qz 1.5 co or 4.7 1.7 1.2 4.7 pi 45.9 37.9 13.4 45.2 (ab) (23.3) (14.6) (5.4) (21.7) (an) (22.6) (23.4) (7.9) (23.6) di 21.0 17.7 11.5 20.1 (wo) (10.6) (9.2) (.6.1) (10.2) (en) (5.5) (6.4) (4.6) (5.2) (fs) (4.9) (2.1) ( .8) (4.7) hy 18.9 29.5 20.6 18.8 (en) (9.9) (22.1) (17.6) (9.8) (fs) (8.9) (7.4) (2.9) (9.0) ol .76 8.7 47.4 (fo) (.38) (6.4) (39.9) (fa) (.38) (2.3) (7.4) = mt . 5.8 3.0 4.9 4.9 ii 2.5 .7 .42 2.8 an .11 n-, ... • are in the higher MgO and lower alkali content of the former. Considerable differences also exist in the trace element concentrations of the two sets of rocks, part- icularly those of Cr and Ni. Such differences lend support to the suggestion made earlier that the two rock groups are unrelated.

Comparison of the composition of the main suite of amphibolites with data for Scourie Dyke rocks of other areas is made in Table 4.2. They appear to be a very homogeneous group indeed, with little variation in composition although the samples are drawn from widely separated regions- Dearnley's data from Scourie Dykes in the... Outer Hebrides and Burns' data from rocks at Laxford on the Scottish mainland. All are typical tholeiites, comparing closely with the composition given by Nockolds (1954) for tholeiitic rocks. A comparison with tholeiitic rocks from other provinces can be made using the data of Table 4.3 (taken from analyses quoted in Carmichael, et al (1974)) in which the compositions of continental tholeiites from the Karoo province and continental dyke swarms are given together with the average composition of oceanic tholeiites (from the Atlantic ridge). As is to be :-•- expected the basic rocks of North Harris correlate quite closely with the various continental tholeiite data, particularly in their trace element concentrations.

In an attempt to gauge the 'normality' of the Maaruig ultrabafic°rocks the estimates of trace element abundances in 'typical' ultrabasics presented by V i nog radvv(i n "U 1 trabas i c and related rocks" edited by Wyllie) are included in Table 4.3. Discrepancies are seen in Ti, Cr, Rb, Sr and Ba but, as Fisher (et al,1969) observed "..the wide variations of composition (shown by ultrabafic rocks) vitiate the calculation of mean elemental abundances for ultramafic rocks taken as a single homogeneous group.." and one should not, therefore, come to regard the Maaruig rocks as atypical because of such variations.

170 N,Harrls Outer Isles Laxford 'Tholeiite' Si02 50.15 48.4 48.9 50.8 Ti02 1.32 2.4 1.9 2.0 A1 203 13.67 13.6 12.6 14.1 Fe203 4.04 3.4 4.5 2.9 FeO 10.59 13.1 10.9 9.1 MnO .21 .25 .24 .18 Mg 0 6.43 5.3 6.4 6.3 CaO 9.86 9.3 9.7 10.4 Na20 2.80 2,4 2.5 2.2 K20 .83 .86 .56 .82 P205 ,10 .13 .18 ,23 Total 100.00 100.4 100.0

Table 4,2 Comparison of Scourie Dyke rocks of North Harris and elsewhere in the Lewisian. Data of the Outer Isles rocks from Dearn1ey (1963) Data from Laxford from Burns ( 1966) Average tholeiite from Nockolds(1954) (see also Table 3,2)

170 Atlantic Karoo Dykes UB average SiO 48.7 2 51.1 51.9 TiO2 1.5 1.0 .78 .03 A1 203 16.3 14.1 14.71 .45 Fe203 1.9 2.1 11.13 Fe0 8.4 • 9.2 Mn0 .11 .2 .18 .15 Mg0 8.0 7.8 7.9 . Ca0 11.2 9.6 10.6 Na20 2.7 2.2 1.9 .57 K20 .25 .8 .6 .03 P205 .15 .12 .06 .02 Total - -- 99.21 98.22 99.7 Sr 148 248 138 10 Rb 8 31 23 2 Zr 69 83 75 30 Ni 146 121 123 200 Ba 95 230 273 6 Cr 525 338 265 2000 K/Rb 313 258 244 Rb/Sr .05 .13 .17 K/Ba 26 35 12 Ba/Rb 12 7 21

Table 4.3 Composition of tholeiitic rocks of various provinces. Data taken from Carmichael et al (1974), from various sources. Average ultrabasic composition of Vinogradv taken from Wyllie (1967)

171 k.8 Geochemical classifications

While various methods of classifying igneous rocks on the basis of their chemistry exist (eg. Kuno.(1968), Winchester, et al (1976)) the methods suggested by Irvine and Baragar (1.971) are followed here. In fig:4.11 the data are plotted in the AFM diagram ((Na20 + K20) - (Fe203 + FeO) - (MgO)) as weight percent. All rocks fall along a tholeiitic trend with the various rock groups falling in well defined clusters, the ultra- basic rocks near the M-F tie line- although the ultra- basic rocks from the lens south of Tarbert show some scatter due to their alteration- the amphibolites towards the iron apex and the noritic rocks inbetween the two. The data of Burns (1966) and the Uig rocks (IGS data) are plotted for comparison and fall in the same field as the North Harris amphibolites. As all the North Harris rocks seem to lie along a single trend the diagram, if taken in isolation, might suggest derivation from a single parent magma by differentiation; for reasons discussed in Section 0, however, this can be shown to be a mistaken premise. A further subdivision, based on the alkali-silica diagram, is shown in fig:4.12. This plot is similar to that employed by Kuno (1968) to classify island arc volcanics but is here simplified to divide the data into the alkalic and tholeiitic fields only. Only the North Harris data are plotted and most fall well within the tholeiitic field. To discriminate within the tholeiites the basalt tetrahedron is employed (fig:4.13). Based on the norm- ative minerals quartz, clinopyroxene, olivine and nepheline the tetrahedron is here shown projected onto a recalculated nepheline-olivine-quartz ternary diagram (see Yoder and Tilley, 1962). As can be seen in the figure the majority of the amphibolites and all of the noritic rocks fall in the undersaturated olivine- normative field with only very few quartz-normative amphibolites. The clustering of amphibolites about the orthopyroxene-plagioclase tie-line suggests that in dry

173 4.8 Geochemical classifications

While various methods of classifying igneous rocks on the basis of their chemistry exist (eg. Kuno.(1968), Winchester, et al (1976)) the methods suggested by Irvine and Baragar (1971) are followed here. In fig:4.11 the data are plotted in the AFM diagram ((Na20 + K20) - (Fe203 + Fe0) - (Mg0)) as weight percent. All rocks fall along a tholeiitic trend with the various rock groups falling in well defined clusters, the ultra- basic rocks near the M-F tie line- although the ultra- basic rocks from the lens south of Tarbert show some scatter due to their alteration- the amphibolites towards the iron apex and the noritic rocks inbetween the two. The data of Burns (1966) and the Uig rocks (IGS data) are plotted for comparison and fall in the same field as the North Harris amphibolites. As all the North Harris rocks seem to lie along a single trend the diagram, if taken in isolation, might suggest derivation from a single parent magma by differentiation; for reasons discussed in Section D, however, this can be shown to be a mistaken premise. A further subdivision, based on the alkali-silica diagram, is shown in fig:4.12. This plot is similar to that employed by Kuno (1968) to classify island arc volcanics but is here simplified to divide the data into the alkalic and tholeiitic fields only. Only the North Harris data are plotted and most fall well within the tholeiitic field. To discriminate within the tholeiites the basalt tetrahedron is employed (fig:4.13). Based on the norm- ative minerals quartz, clinopyroxene, olivine and nepheline the tetrahedron is here shown projected onto a recalculated nepheline-olivine-quartz ternary diagram (see Yoder and Tilley, 1962). As can be seen in the figure the majority of the amphibolites and all of the noritic rocks fall in the undersaturated olivine- normative field with only very few quartz-normative amphibolites. The clustering of amphibolites about the orthopyroxene-plagioclase tie-line suggests that in dry

173 Fig:4,11 AFM diagram of the North Harris rocks J Data of other Scourie Dyke amphibolites is included for comparison,

174 10

Alkal ic

• :• 0. Tholelitic

00 s o0

50 60 70 % S102

Fig:1:.12 Alkal i-si 1 ica diagrarn amphibclites • noritic rocks O Maaruig US a. S of Ta rbe rt U8 4

175 N d

N O tt-

C Mme • X •~ OQ Q Oa 0 a, 0 ,4 C h t af a O

a D a a

Fig;4.13 The basalt tetrahedron (Projected onto the nepheline-quartz r olivine base). O Symbols as in fig:4.12

176 melts these rocks could give clinopyroxene-orthopyroxene- plagioclase compositions only at pressures of 5-15kb, eclogitic assemblages being produced at higher pressures. (See section D).

4.9 Tectonic environment: the use of geochemical discrimination diagrams

Several types of discriminatory diagrams exist in the literature which are suggested as being useful in determining the igneous regime of a suite of rocks, based on aspects of their geochemistry. As the basic rocks of North Harris are obvious continental tholeiites it was thought apposite to spend some time putting such methods to the test. All the methods depend on the belief that certain elements remain unaffected by metasomatism and other changes after the consolidation of the rocks in which they occur and, equally, that these elements show conc- entrations unique to the environment in which the rocks were formed so as to be able to define that environment by analytical work alone. Pearce et al (1970) used Zr, Ti and Sr and attempted to divide the rocks into three or four categories while Pearce,( 1975) suggested the use of TiO2' K20 and P205 and divide the rocks solely into oceanic and non-oceanic types. Strongly fractionated rocks should not be plotted using either method, while ekat the method of Pearce (1975) required that the total alkali content of the rocks should be less than 20% in an AFM diagram. The resultant diagrams for the North Harris rocks (including the ultrabasics) are shown in figs:4414 and 4.15. In the former, using the method of Pearce,(l975), the basic rocks plot along a 'trend of alteration' (ie. K20 enrichment) and fall in both the oceanic and non-oceanic fields. The rocks with greatest relative

TiO2 are, in fact, the hornblende-granulites. The ultrabasic rocks show an interesting distribution with the Maaruig rocks falling in the non-oceanic field and those from Tarbert in the oceanic field.

177 Ti02 1102

'oceanic'

'non-oceanic'

P205 K20 P205

Fig:4.14 Ti02-K20-P205 discrimination diagram (Pearce, et a ) ; 1975) Symbols as in fig:4.12

A low-K tholeiites b calc-alkali basalis c ocean floor basalts

Zr Sr/2

Fig:4.15 Ti-Zr-Sr discrimination diagram ( Pearce, et a); 1973) Symbols as in fig:4.12

178 Fig:4.15, the Zr-Ti-Sr plot of Pearce (1970), shows a considerable spread of data points for the North Harris rocks, the amphibolites plotting outside all defined regions while the noritic and ultrabasic rocks are scattered across them. It would seem, therefore, that for metamorphosed equivalents of basic igneous rocks these techniques fail to discriminate between the various possible tectonic regimes which they purport to identify.

4.10 Metamorphic geochemistry

Element variations in the North Harris rocks are plotted-in fig:4.16 using the Thornton-Tuttle differ- entiation index (1960). The index is calculated by summing the weight percent normative constituents of quartz, orthoclase, albite, nepheline, leucite and kaliophilite only three of which are present in any norm. It is generally used to define igneous trends in element concentrations, and as can be seen in fig :4.16 such trends are not evidenced by the North Harris data.which shows clustering according to rock group. The trace element concentrations are more or less randomly distributed. This lack of igneous characteristics in amphibolite facies rocks was noted in data collected for the South Harris diorite (R.Horsley, pers.comm.) in which granulite facies rocks.retained strong igneous features while the rocks representing the amphibolite facies metamorphism showed no such trends. This would seem to suggest that the effect of metamorphism at medium grade may be to oblit- erate original igneous variations. Exactly how such a hypothesis could be applied to the trends shown in the gneisses (Chapter 3),which were thought to be relict igneous features,is discussed in Chapter, 6.

A further example of the control of chemistry by metamorphism is shown, as in the gneisses, by the K/Rb ratios of these rocks. Although somewhat variable in each rock group (see Table 4.1) the ratios tend to cluster around _a general ratio similar to that of the

179 •

60 • 55 a a • abb e. • .b•o dem• • 50 • y • •o a • •• • • •. • a • • S i02 a • f.• 45 ao 4 a a a

s 0• 2 • • 0 . • TiO • 2 p.0 • • • •• b• 1 • . • A bad 0 NOLD

•0• 15

bb 1C

5 aoo a 0 A1 203

7 0• 6 • Fe203 5 • 0 •• . 0 4 . ▪ a • '• 180 3 • 0 a TOR b • 2 0 b bs 0

0

14 12 10 8 6 4

5 10 20 30 40 50 Differentiation index Fig:4.16 Variation diagrams for the North Harris basic and ultrabasic rocks. Oxides plotted against differentiation index. Symbols as in fig:4.12 180 a•

r;• O •• MnO

bbd 0

O O 35 e

30 0

25

20 A

15

in . , •..•.• .:. 5 •

14

12 I • • . •• • 10 A CaO abb • • :Ob .• 8 D • 6 4 2

.10 8 Na20 6 4 . 2 • »1 I bb i . 0 0 A . 5 10 20 30 40 50

Fig :4.16 continued

181

3

2

1

5 10 20 30 40 50

.20

.15 • o. .10

• .05 :o P205

• • 30 b

20 0 • E 0 A 10 n Rb 0 0 0

300

200 • 0 • • 0 • • . • A o O 100 nn O P A

10 20 30 40

Fig:4.16 continued Trace elements (ppm)

182 a

- 400 • Ba

. 200 . 0. • • .0 0 0 • Ca A 0 4

7000 0 0

a 6000 Cr 0

• 5000 a

4000

3000

0 2000 0 •

• O a 1000

1500 • 0 0

1000 A Ni

500 O 0

0 . • • •• •0 0 .

0 . 150 • O • 100 . • 00 n a 004 tr 50 A

10 20 30 4o Fig :4.16 continued

183 gneisses and granitic rocks (fig:3.11) and would there- fore seem to be controlled by the metamorphic episode to which all these rocks were subjected.

4.11 Summary

a) The amphibolites of North Harris show a composition similar to Scourie Dyke rocks of other regions both in the Outer Hebrides and on the mainland. The noritic rocks show marked contrasts with respect to the amphibolites in both major and trace element concentrations (particularly MgO and total Fe). Significant differences exist between the Maaruig and Tarbert ultrabasics, emphasising the conclusion made in the previous section that these rocks are unrelated. b) All groups are tholeiitic being mainly undersaturated, olivine-normative types. They are continental tholeiites and compare closely in composition to such rocks in other provinces. c) The effects of metamorphism on whole rock chemistry is difficult to elucidate in the absence of knowledge concerning the exact original composition. That meta- morphism has had some effect on their chemistry is suggested by the possible 'randomisation' of igneous trends in variation diagrams and by the effect on the K/Rb ratios.

184 Section C: Geochemistry of selected basic and ultrabasic rocks

In this section is recorded the results of detailed studies into the petrology and whole-rock and mineral chemistries of two important suites of rocks. These are: a) The noritic rocks of Ardvourlie b) The ultrabasic rocks of Maaruig A general account of the petrology of these bodies has been given in section A and is not repeated here.

4.12 The noritic and associated rocks of Ardvourlie

4.12.1 Field relations

The map of fig:4.17 shows the disposition of the various lithologies of which this body is composed. A central core of orthopyroxene-plagioclase rocks is surrounded by and grade into foliated amphibolites of several types- coarse, speckled metagabbro; fine- grained clinopyroxene amphibolite; and so on. Included in fig:4.17 are the localities of felsic veins which cut the rocks of the body. They are thought to be rather impersistent, fine-grained pegmatites rather than felsic 'sweat-outs' from the mafic rocks themselves. In the noritic core are several elongate pods of altered rocks (fig:4.18) whose composition suggests that they represent the most mafic portions of the body. Mineralogically they lack the coarse texture and large orthopyroxene crystals of the other norites but other- wise appear to be merely finer-grained equivalents.

The overall structure is that of a strongly assym- etrical antiform, plunging to the south-east, with a steep northern limb and gently dipping southern limb. An axial planar foliation dipping at some 30° to the south-west is seen in the foliated rocks of the body. The folds are part of a set which continue southwards, the basic rocks becoming thinned and eventually completely disrupted (fig:4.1).

185

Gcw:isses + ?91'. aw.04011e. sa 3S Coarse. mont vbdIix.

i•

i 3.Z9 • +44

()Tx- et0.- Zone of altceel vbaw.s {t , 4 (basic Rods (Fi3 a-ts) ~t1S~c Ye.IUS +tt+ ,

vto itlC If•d•cf - - - Goo s a a v∎phibol'dtc.

Gnt 3g 3-2 4i°1

Qhpi:4,cal . .$-s Crneiss t/ eoeaS t

Coo.ese" a NpkuolZkt 1

t

♦ F{ak -\+4∎x5 gnciSses

Fig:4.17 Sketch map of the noritic and associated rocks at Ardvourlie. Scale 1:5000

186 Fig:t+.18 Mafic pod within noritic rocks, Ardvourlie.

187 The extensive outcrop of these rocks is due to a fortuitous combination of structure and topography. The true thickness of the layer is probably in the order of 20-30m and this decreases rapidly to both west and south. Disembodied continuations of these

rocks, some of considerable size, can be traced for F several kilometres to the north-west.

t1.. 12.2 Petrology and mineral chemistry

As described in section A the most important feature of this body is the presence of noritic rocks in which original igneous features are almost completely preserved. During the production of the amphibolites which enclose these rocks the orthopyroxene is converted to pargasitic amphibole, the plagioclase recrystallised and Mg-rich garnet produced in coronas around the pyroxene. With further retrogression the orthopyroxene is lost and an amphibolite produced whose texture mirrors that of the original rocks. Ultimately this feature is also lost and a variety of foliated amphib- olites with thoroughly metamorphic mineralogy and texture are produced. The initial stages of this process require little in the way of element migrations. A study of the chemistry of the various phases shows both the garnet and amphibole to be quite Mg-rich. It appears that the orthopyroxene and plagioclase react to give coronas containing less calcic plagioclase and Mg-garnet, such reaction liberating Na, Al and Ca from the feldspar which becomes incorporated in the amphibole; this latter reaction releases Mn and Fe which is incorporated in the garnet. It is only when retrogression becomes more advanced and a foliation developed that bulk chemical changes are produced- as is described in the following section. r Mineral chemistry also provides further evidence of the original igneous nature of the noritic rocks in the orthopyroxene compositions. In fig:5.ka weight percent CaO is plotted against weight percent FeO, 188 while in fig:5.4b weight percent A1 203 is plotted against weight percent (FeO + MgO) for all analysed orthopyroxenes in the North Harris rocks. These diagrams are used to differentiate between orthopyroxene compositions from igneous and metamorphic rocks and, as can be seen, the data for the noritic pyroxenes falls in the igneous fields of both diagrams, emphasising the conclusion made on petrological grounds that these rocks do represent unaltered original igneous assemblages.

4.12.3 Whole rock chemistry

Study of Table 4.1 shows the noritic rocks to have a high-MgO and correspondingly low total Fe content when compared to the average composition of the amphibolites (a feature which is very marked in the AFM diagram), a composition to which the amphibolites derived from the noritic rocks compare surprisingly closely. These and other variations are shown diagramatically in fig:4.19. All element show some change in concentration between the norite and the amphibolites with MgO, FeO, A1 203 and K20 exhibiting the greatest variations of ail. The variability of composition in the noritic rocks themselves are due partly to the fact that one sample (324) was taken from one of the more mafic lenses (fig:4.18) but also reflects the effects of metamorphism. Although not shown on the diagram (for want of data on the amphibolites) the concentrations of Cr, Ni and Zr ān4 high in the norites (relative to amphibolites in general) while Sr, Rb, 8a and P are lower.

These enormous changes in chemistry involved in the development of the amphibolites represent the first argument against the possibility that these noritic rocks were the parents of much of the basic material (now amphibolites) seen in the area, an argument which is developed more fully in section D.

189 52 ___..• • S i 02 50

48

46

44

MgO •~

.A 1 2 03

12 •Fe0 • 10 Fe0 • A1203 . . -. i 8 Cad

6 —.MgO Na20 • 4 Fe203 ' , , . • ;Fe203 2 \•— ~ -.__ _y no

.75

.50

.25 ._,• Mn0. •—.i•------• • •Mn0 r`20

321: 327 329 259 252 254 319 251 noritic rocks amphibolites

Fig:4.19 Variations in whole rock chemistry within the noritic rocks, and between them and the marginal amphibolites.

All oxides in weight percent..

190 4.13 Ultrabasic rocks of the Maaruig Complex

4.13.1 Petrology and mineral chemistry

In section A the general petrology of these rocks was described and it was shown that the rocks were made up of large orthopyroxene crystals set in a predominantly olivine matrix. The general appearance of the rocks and minerals suggest that original igneous phases and textures (possibly cumulates ?) are preserved, in spite of the ubiquitous presence of amphibole and occasional effects of serpentinisation. In the field a crude 'succession' of rock types may be postulated, based on the size and relative proportions of the orthopyroxene crystals. At the base of this series orthopyroxene appears to be present in only small amounts; above this occurs rocks with very large ortho- pyroxenes sieved with olivines, which grade into lithol- ogles with smaller pyroxenes and fewer olivine inclusions (the relative proportions remaining much the same). The remainder of the series is marked by variations in the size and proportions of the pyroxenes until, at the top of the sequence, interstitial feldspar is seen. This succession is not regularly developed in the outcrops, as can be seen in fig:4.20, an irregularity due to the fact that the structure is more complex than that originally envisaged (of a syncline) and possibly also to irregularity in the layering. It is only when variations in both mineral and whole rock chemistries are studied that a sequence can be correctly established and the structure elucidated (see 4.13.3 below). Modal analyses show that systematic bulk variations in mineralogical composition through the sequence do not occur, although obtaining representative modal analyses is made difficult by having to allow for the presence of amphibole, some of which (if not actually all of it) is derived from the orthopyroxene.

Analyses were made of orthopyroxene, olivine and chromite in six samples taken from various parts of the series and as the results of such work are of great

191 +- + Gneiss with included basic/UB pods sheared UB at the base B Opxn z-lcm (slides 171 and 1 81 ) C

D Feldspathic UB at the top of the sequence (183)

Gneiss

0

A Opxn virtually absent ('base' ?)

D 1 cm opxns (slide 170)

C Discrete, small opxns: no olivine inclusions (slide 168)

Opxns lcm with included olivine (slide 167)

B Large opxns, 2 cms, sieved with olivines (slides 166 ana 182)

Fig:4.20 Sequence of rock types in the Maaruig complex the best exposures occur along the roadside but even then are incomplete. The sequence does not suggest a simple repetition such as might be expected in a simple synformal structure such as was first envisaged. (see also fig:4.23)

192 significance in the present discussion they are presented here rather than in the mineral chemistry chapter (Chpt.5). Fig:4,2l shows the variations of oxides, end member molecules and element ratios in these phases and the various features can be summarised as follows: a) Both orthopyroxene and olivine exhibit a reduction of Mg relative to iron towards the top of the sequence, a feature mirrored in the whole rock Fe/Fe + Mg ratio (total iron being quite constant in the whole rock compositions) b) The Ca component of the orthopyroxene, and A1 203 both increase towards the top of the sequence the latter particularly in the feldspathic rock. MnO decreases in this_-series. c) The sharp variation in the 'Ca' component of the orthopyroxene in sample 181' is mirrored by the 'Mg' component while 'Fe' remains constant, suggesting substitution of Mg by Ca in the mineral through the series. d) Chrōmite shows similar variations with increased FeO, decreased MgO and A1 203 and near constant Cr205 through the series. The data for the chromites of sample 183 is somewhat unreliable representing as it does an average of several disparate analytical results.

• The feldspar of the uppermost rocks is very clouded and forms a highly irregular interstitial phase. It is labradorite (An 56%) but also contains 1.7% MgO, 1.2% FeO and .07% Cr205. It undoubtedly represents the residuum of these rocks after consolidation of other portions of the series.

Following the study of the orthopyroxenes of the noritic rocks the Maaruig pyroxenes were plotted on the variation diagrams of fig:5.L+ (Chapter 5). In the A1 203 versus (Feo + MgO) diagram the minerals fall into the field of igneous orthopyroxene while,.the CaO versus FeO diagram is at variance with this interpretation. The reason for this discrepancy seems to be the presence of very fine lamellae of calcic pyroxene which remains unanalysed, giving the analyses a spuriously low CaO content (see also Chapter 5,,5.1.2). 183 r 168

181

167

166

182 .15 .20 80 35 90 3.0 4.0 .05 .15 .15

Whole rock Fe/Fe+Mg % Fo in olivine Mg/Fe ratio Mn0 in olivine (•)

(olivine • opxn o) and opxn (o)

183r

168 F■'///'

167 N

166

182 3 10 15 80 85 90 1 2 3 % Al % Fs in opxn %E in opxn % Ca0 in opxn

Fig:4.21 Variations in mineral chemistry in the Me ruig ultrabasic rocks. 'note the suq-ested sequence on this evidence) 183 0.. 0._ .Q 168 \ ,\ / •~ 181: • •

1/• 0 • • 167 • O

166 i•

s' % J 1 82 1 • • /• . 0 10 20 30 40 50 oxide

Fig:4.21 (continued) Chromates. The data for the chromates of slide 183 is somewhat unreliable.

195 4.13.2 Whole rock chemistry

While variations in mineral chemistry are quite marked, the lack of systematic variations in the prop- ortions of minerals results in less striking variations in whole rock chemistry than might otherwise have been expected. The variations in chemistry of rocks sampled through the layering are presented in fig:4.22 from which it may be seen that only Mg0 and Si02 show any great variation (37% to 33% and 42% to 46%, resp- ectively). Both A1 203 and K20 show an increase in the feldspathic rocks. Trace element variations involve a general increase of Rb, Zr and P through the series while Cr and Ni remain fairly constant.

4.13.3 The structure of the complex

The lack of adequate exposure of these rocks leads to it being extremely difficult to determine the true structure of the complex, although it was possible to regard it as a synclinal structure on the basis of suspected lithological variations and the orientation of the banding. However the geochemical data makes it possible to define a more accurate sequence which can be superimposed on the earlier conception of a simple syncline. Using the variations in both mineral and whole rock chemistries to establish the positions of the various samples in the sequence allows them to be plotted on a map and a variety of structures proposed to explain their distribution. The simplest of such schemes is shown in fig:4.23 in which two smaller synclines are separated by an anticline; in one of the synclines are exposed the feldspathic rocks at the top of the series while rocks from near the base appear in the anticline.

196 46

44 S102 42

40

38 • MgO

36

34

32

10 Fe0 ~ 8

6 le203 4

2 CaO

•aN 20 ,5

.25 Ti . . Mn 'K20

182 168 170 181 183

Figr4.22 Variations in whole rock chemistry of the Maaruig ultrabasic rocks. All oxides in weight percent. Note the general agreement between these trends and those of the mineral chemistry;

197 200 i 150 ) 100 Ni

800

7000

6000

5000 Cr

150

100 Ba 50

300 200 Zr 100 /• 0 ----— .

30

20

10

80

i 60 4o 400 O 350

300

250 . 200 I- 182 168 170 (181) 183

Fig:4e22 continued Trace elements (ppm), Fig:4.23 Map showing the suggested structure of the Maarūig ultrabasic complex,.

199 Section D: Petrogenesis

to this, the final section of the chapter, the data presented previously are brought together as the basis for a discussion of both the original igneous and sub- sequent metamorphic histories of these rocks. To refresh the reader's memory of points brought out in the earlier sections that are of importance in the discussion which follows these points are summarised at the beginning of this section. There then follows an attempt to define the igneous history of the rocks, a discussion of their metamorphic history and, finally, a set of conclusions concerning the features and problems of petrogenesis.

4.14 'The story so far'

a) In North Harris the gneisses include numerous bands and lenses of basic and ultrabasic material, many of which contain purely metamorphic assemblages and are deformed and foliated. b) Basic rocks are more common than ultrabasic rocks, the latter occuring principally in only two localities, at Maaruig and at Tarbert. These two appear to be unrelated, a conclusion based on both petrological and geochemical features. c) in the basic rocks amphibolites predominate but in a few localities 'hornblende-granulite' assemblages are seen characterised by small, even grain size, lack of alteration and equilibrium textures. Elsewhere rocks with noritic, orthopyroxene-plagioclase, assemblages may be seen. These latter have relict igneous textures and mineraiogies and a chemistry markedly different to that of the other basic rocks. d) Age relations are hard to define in these rocks. It seems likely that many of the basic rocks and the Maaruig ultrabasics are members of the Scourie Dyke suite, intruded prior to Laxfordian events, but they may not all have been produced at the same time or from the same magma source (see below). e) The bas ic rocks are chiefly olivine normative continental tholeiites. Being tholeiitic implies their

200 derivation by partial melting of mantle material at the base of the crust (at moderate depths, 35-1+Okm).. The position of these rock's on the olivine-normative / quartz- normative divide of the basalt tetrahedron leads to the suggestion that crystallisation of cpxn-opxn-plag assemblages in dry melts could occur at pressures of less than 15 kilobars. f) The effects of metamorphism on the chemistry of these rocks is uncertain. Igneous trends are not preserved and may well have been obliterated by metamorphism. Comparison with data from the Scourie Dykes of Laxford (Burns, 1966) in which relict minerals are preserved shows the compositions to be unchanged and it is there- fore believed that metamorphism was to a great extent isochemical and thus original igneous trends were only weakly developed originally.

1+.15 Igneous history

In section 4.3 rocks with apparently relict igneous mineralogies and textures were described; these were the noritic rocks at Ardvourlie and the ultrabasic rocks of the Maeruig complex. All other basic rocks exhibit meta- morphic assemblages which obscure the original igneous mineralogy. In an attempt to surmount this problem all three groups of rocks were studied.using their whole rock chemistries and the methods `of Pearce ( 1968, 1969, and 1970).

4.15.1 Pearce plot analysis

Pearce (1968) showed that many of the conventional variation diagrams (Harker diagrams, ternary plots,etc) distort genetic trends. He suggested that such distortion could be avoided by including a third, constant, parameter Into the various element ratios, arguing that '...dividing two variables by a third parameter does not change the relationship between them if the third parameter is a constant.' This parameter must be constant in absolute terms although its relative proportions to the other variables changes as those variables change.

201 Taking possibly the simplest case, that of olivine fractionation, FeO, MgO and S€02 are extracted from the system as olivine Is precipitated. All other oxides are neither added nor subtracted and therefore remain constant In absolute terms, although becoming concentrated in the residual liquid, and any of these oxides could be used as the 'third parameter' to study the differentiation of the rocks in question (eg. Pearce (1969). used A1 203 in his study of the Oundonald , Ontario). In this example the ratio MgO:Si02 (or, in Pearce's example, MgO/A1 203:Si02/A1 203) will be controlled by the stoichiometry of the precipitating olivine, a graph of this ratio being a straight line whose slope is the same_.. as the MgO:Si02 ratio of the precipitating phase. If the composition of the olivine was to change during fractionation this line would become curved. As more minerals become involved in t1e fractionation the inter- pretation of these ratios become more complicated because the various oxides have to be shared out between. phases and the choice of a constant parameter becomes extremely difficult.

In this study of the North Harris rocks K20 was chosen as the constant parameter for the following reasons: a) The fractionated phases (including plagioclase) contain little or no K20, which should therefore .remain virtually constant during fractionation. b) That this is the case is suggested by the fact that of several ratios used K20 was the oxide whose ratio with 5i02 most frequently approximated to zero (.008 in the amphibolites, .01 in the Maaruig rocks and .007 in the noritic rocks). c) It was thought that the main drawback in using K20 would be the relative ease with which the element is believed to migrate during metamorphism. However, even in the amphibolites the data still produce strongly correlated ratios and, as one would expect the migration of K20 to be rather random and hence greatly affect such ratios and the linearity and correlation of the trends, the absence of such effects is taken as indicating that migration of K20 did not, in fact, occur.

202 To apply the method to analytical results the mole- cular proportions of each element are divided by that of the element chosen as the constant parameter and the data plotted as element:Si02 diagrams. The slopes, intercepts and statistical parameters of such diagrams were calculated by regression anlaysis using program GCOR (ICC Library) and LINFIT (a custom-built correlation program). The trend lines are drawn by eye, taking into account the various statistical data given by the two programs.

4.15.2 Interpretation

On stoichiometric grounds (and assuming ideal solid solution between end members) the (Fe + Mg)/Si ratios can be calculated for olivine and the pyroxenes:

(Mg + Fe)/Si olivine Mg2SiO4-Fe2SiO4 2.0

opxns MgSi206-Fe2S106 1 ,0

cpxns CaMgSi206-CaFeSi206 0.5 and the observed ratios compared to ,them in an attempt to decide which ferromagnesian phase was being precip- itated. This ratio is particularly instructive for the line produced is independent of the ferromagnesian mineral involved and will therefore: preserve the original fractionation trend even if the early phase has been recrystallised. Using the Fe:Si, Mg:Si and Ca:Si ratios enables the calculation of the composition of the fractionating phase in terms of its end members (see the examples below).

In a similar way, using the Ca:Si, Na:Si,and Al:Si ratios the composition of the fractionating plagioclase may be estimated, the situation being complicated by the presence of calcic or aluminous pyroxenes or by the incorporation in the ferromagnesian minerals of any of the three elements. The presence of such two-phase assemblages results

203 both in the distribution of elements between them and, as an adjunct to this, the element ratios fall between the theoretical slopes for each mineral- for example the (Fe + Mg)/Si ratio of orthopyroxene is 1.0 and for plagioclase 'zero' and thus a combination of the two yields a ratio which is somewhat below 1.0. Actual examples of such interactions are shown for the North Harris rocks in figs:4.25, 4.26 and 4.27.

4.15.3 Application to the rocks of North Harris

Fig:4.24 (a-dYshows the various element ratios for all three rock groups. Interpretation of the data of the noritic rocks is complicated by there only being four analysed samples, but some strong trends can nevertheless be seen in several of the diagrams. The slopes are listed in the following table for ease of reference:

amphibolites noritic rocks Maaruig rocks (Fe+Mg)/Si .38 .87 1.30 Mg/Si .19 .72 1.20 Fe/Si .17 .14 .15 Ca /Si .23 .17. .09 Al /Si .20 .07 .0k Na /Si .16 .01 .01 Ti /Si .003 .005 .003 Mn/Si .005 003 ' .003

In this table slopes of .10 or less can for all practical purposes be ignored. a) The Maaruig ultrabasic rocks

From the petrological evidence of section 4.4 the phases involved throughout the Maaruig sequence are orthopyroxene and olivine, and hence only the Fe, Mg and Ca ratios need be considered. The (Fe + Mg)/Si ratio of 1.3 is compatible with the co-precipitation of olivine and orthopyroxene, whose compositions can be calculated from the Fe and Mg ratios.

204 LL.. C) (total)+MgO/K20 700 400 500 600 300 800 200 Fig:4.24a Graphs 100 Lines aredrawn calculated methods Maaruig Amphibolites • Noritic rockso 100

of element 200 of UB

Pearce (1968,1969). in correlation programs.. 300 sio 'by ratios drawnaccordingto

2 205 eye' k 2 o ttOO while

the 500

slopes were 600

the 700 700, "I I

600

500

.. 400

0 300 N ...... ~ 0 0 m ,_ ..... :l: 200 '/ Q . o·b ~ 1~0 O" ,-.~ .. O . ~.;. - ~• .. ---- .--• . ~.... !..:.:.. ••-.:.~: ------' • '~."."""i. 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 S i02 /K2O ....

125 ,

" ". o· 100 , Q'\ /v"'. u

75

50

25

• • o lOa 200 400 500 600 700 Fig:4.24b 001 009 005 Doti 00£ 00z 0

V N 0

0 Ot

oz~/ZO!s 00£ OOZ 001 001 009 005 OOtr 0

OZ~1/ ZO! s 001 009 005 oot, 00£ 00Z 001 0

Os C-) Di 0 7c N 001

Ost

00t 3.0

o 2.0 N • ~ ...... ~ o c ::£: . " 1.0 ~~ • _0 - 0 .D 0 , ~. • • g ~0 .:6'.·.·.:,..,.,. , ...... ••·0 • • a 100 200 400 500 600 700

3.0

2.0 0 N ~ ...... N 0 .... 1.0 • -----:-: .:.--- . D • o· 0 0- • •• • 0 100 200 400 500 600 700

fig:4.24d

208 These calculated compositions can then be compared with those obtained from mineral analyses.

Calculated Observed Opxn En Fs10 Wo6 12 Wo 84 En86 Fs 2 Olivine Fo Fs12 Fo85 Fs15 88

Hence there is close agreement between the calculated and observed compositions of both orthopyroxene and olivine. This would suggest both that the iron and magnesium were partitioned more or less equally between the two phases (see also Chapter 5) and that the observed chemical feattres can be satisfactorily explained by olivine- orthopyroxene crystallisation, the original phases remaining unchanged through metamorphism. Note also that as amphibole is not suggested in this scheme the possibility of much of the amphibole seen in the present assemblages being primary (section A) can be discounted. Fig:4.25 shows; schematically the relationships between the whole rock and mineral ratios for Fe, Mg and Ca. The ratios observed in the plagiocalse seen at the top of the sequence are included although its influence is only felt in the Ca:Si ratio.

b) Noritic rocks

The interpretation of the various ratios for these rocks is made difficult by the being only four samples (a number which does not allow meaningfull regression analysis). However some quite obvious trends are apparent in fig:4.24 and an attempt can be made to interpret the diagrams. Fig:4.26 shows the relationships between the whole rock and mineral ratios for all elements and it may be seen that the whole rock ratios are very much controlled by the precipitation of orthopyroxene and plagioclase. (as is suggested by petrological evidence alone, of course). Again, the composition of the two phases can be calculated, assuming that all iron and magnesium are incorporated in the pyroxene and all calcium, sodium and aluminium in the plagioclase.

209 ( Fe+Mg)/Si Fe/SI

Mg /S i Ca /S i

Fig:4.25 Schematic representation of whole rock and mineral ratios in the Maaruig ultrabasics.

210 (Fe+Mg) /S i Fe/Si

Mg/Si Mn/Si

Ti/Si Ca/Si

Al/Si Na/S I

Fig :14..26 Schematie representation of whole rock and mineral ratios in the noritic rocks.

211 Calculated Observed Opxn En84 Fs16 Woo En73 Fs24 Wo3

Plag Na14 Cab1 A1 25 Na lo Ca~5 A1 65,

An = 81% An = 60%

The calculated orthopyroxene composition is some- what too Mg-rich, a feature which correlates with with the Mg:Si ratio (whole rock) being greater than the Mg:Si ratio (mineral). The (Fe + Mg)/Si ratio can only indicate orthopyroxene precipitation, as in the Maaruig rocks. The plagioclase composition is far too calcic, a feature due to two factors: a) a certain proportion of Ca and Al would, in fact, be incorporated in the orthopyroxene, although not to an extent sufficient to explain such a large discrepancy b) the slopes of these particular elements are particularly difficult to define and hence errors are possible when calculating their slopes. Nonethelesss from the diagrams of fig:4.25 it seems that co-precipitation of orthopyroxene and plagioclase explain the whole rock ratios adequately, as was expected on the basis of the observed petrology of these rocks. c) The amphibolites

Both of the previous rock groups required-little work of this kind to define the original mineralogy, for much of their original assemblages are preserved. However they do provide some indication of how the method may be applied prior to studying the amphibolites in which the original assemblages have been obliterated by metamorphism. Fig:4.27 shows the relationships between the various mineralogical ratios (averages of the available data) and the whole rock ratios for all elements. On the basis of the (Fe + Mg)/Si ratio alone the precipitated ferromagnesian phase can only have been clinopyroxene, and all ratios are best explained by the co-precipitation of clinopyroxene and plagioclase.,

212 (Fe+Mg) /Si Fe/Si

Mg/Si Mn /S I

Ti /S i Ca/Si

Al /Si

Fig:4.27 Schematic representation of whole rock and mineral ratios in the amphibolites.

213 From the various ratios a composition of the prec- ipitating clinopyroxene can be estimated as:

Calculated Observed Cpxn En En32 Fs29 Wo39 31 Fs25 Wo44

The correlation between the calculated and observed compositions suggests that the bulk of the clinopyroxene in the amphibolite assemblages is original, if recryst- allised, igneous pyroxene. An estimated composition for the precipitating plagioclase gives an An content of some 60% (labradorite), although this calculation takes no account of the Ca which is incorporated in the clinopyroxene, a feature which would result in the actual composition of the plagioclase being somewhat less calcic,

4.15.4 Summary

The data calculated from these diagrams falls along well defined, strongly correlated linear trends the interpretation of which suggests that all the rock groups of the region were produced by the precipitation of only a few mineral species. The general conclusions made from the study may be summarised thus: a) The noritic rocks were produced by precipitation of orthopyroxene and plagioclase. The analysed and calculated compositions of the pyroxenes compare quite well, but difficulty exists in estimating the original plagioclase composition. b) The rocks of the Maaruig complex were produced by precipitation of olivine and orthopyroxene, whose present compositions are very similar to the theoretical compositions calculated from the diagrams. c) The amphibolites were produced by the precipitation of clinopyroxene and plagioclase, of which much of the former seems to have been retained in the metamorphic assemblages.

Such results would suggest that the Maaruig rocks and the norites belong to a separate group of intrusions from that producing the majority of the amphibolites.

214 Such a suggestion is further supported by the need for gross chemical changes in the production of simple amphib- olite compositions from the basic noritic material (as was described in section C), changes which could only occur on a local scale and having little affect on the surrounding rocks. The original extent and distribution of such noritic rocks is unknown, but such material was probably a rather minor component of the Scourie Dyke suite.

215 4.16 Metamorphic history

As was described earlier, rocks with relict igneous mineralogies and textures are only rarely preserved, the most important being the noritic rocks in the east and north-east and the Maaruig ultrabasics. The former are deformed and metamorphosed to give a variety of amphib- olite types, but for reasons given in section 4.15 it is thought unlikely that these rocks were the precursors of the majority of the amphibolites of the region. On geochemical grounds the original assemblages from which the amphibolites were derived seem to have consisted of clinopyroxene and plagioclase, little of which now remains._ The variety of amphibolite types may be summarised: a) clinopyroxene amphibolites b) simple amphibolites c) two-pyroxene amphibolites Any of these categories may contain garnet. Of these (a) is the most common throughout the area as a whole, possibly due to the presence of clinopyroxene in the original assemblages; certainly orthopyroxene is a much less common constituent. Type,(b), in which the assemblages are predominantly composed of amphibole and plagioclase, occur throughout the region but in the Tarbert area Forms the predominant amphibolite type- for reasons which are discussed. below. Of the two pyroxene assemblages,(c), there are two further categories; the first is that of an orthopyroxene-bearing ampbibolite, often coarse-grained and irregularly textured and not appreciably different to other amphibolites; and the second, here classed as hornblende granulite, characterised by a granular, even texture, 'clean' and unaltered appear- ance, triple point junctions in plagioclase and a more calcic variety of the plagioclase. In several papers Dearnley (1962, 1973) has postulated an early Laxfordian granulite facies metamorphism to explain the presence of such hornblende granulite assemblages- 'Also a post-dyke phase of granulite facies (Early Laxfordian) metamorphism Followed by a later (Late Laxfordian) retrogression to amphibolite facies seems to be the sequence of events

216 most closely compatible with the field relationships of the dykes and mineral associations in the grey gneisses' (1973). Such a conclusion was argued against by Moorbath, et al (1975) on the evidence of Pb, Sr and U isotope studies, the ratios of which point to only a single, Scourian, granulite event and thus they suggest auto- metamorphic changes in the dykes after emplacement to explain the 'granulite' assemblages. Myers (1968) suggested local high-grade conditions within an otherwise amphibolite facies metamorphic event within which such assemblages could be produced. The evidence provided by the North Harris rocks is discussed below. k..16.1 Variations in metamorphic assemblages

The range of metamorphic assemblages in these rocks has been reiterated at the beginning of the present section, and described more fully in earlier sections of the chapter. Any scheme put forward to attempt to explain such variations must also take into account the following: a) The homogeneous chemistry of the amphibolites when taken as a group b) The preservation of original assemblages c) The presence of the hornblende granulite assemblages d) The evidence of metamorphic reactions in amphibolite .y assemblages. - With these criteria in mind several schemes may be proposed in which this mixture of assemblage types may have been produced. They are presented initially as rather simple sequences and then the possible factors governing the formation of the various assemblages are discussed. (I) The original igneous assemblages were subjected to an early granulite facies metamorphism producing mainly anhydrous assemblages with locally preserved original igneous material. Subsequent amphibolite Facies metamorphism then created a variety of amphibolites, with local preservation of the granulite assemblages:

217 Original minerals

early granulite facies metamorphism 1 Anhydrous assemblages. amphibolite facies metamorphism

original amphibolite anhydrous minerals types assemblages 4111.0.1.111•1■0=0•■■•■•■••••■•■•■••■11111. Of00011.111111

(2) Overall amphibolite facies metamorphism, with local 'higher-grade areas in which granulite assemblages are produced. Later stages in metamorphism creates other metamorphic assemblages in certain amphibolites (in areas of pegmatite production, for example):

Original minerals 4, amphibolite facies local higher metamorphism grade ? ;77e17717-' anhydrous types assemblages

later changes ••••■•••■AL*I 41p-P.mmmAr original amphibolite anhydrous minerals types assemblages

(The arguments against an early, pervasive, granulite facies metamorphic event makes this the more acceptable of the two models).

There are several variables which could be expected to exercise control over the production of new metamorphic assemblages and the preservation of old lithologies (that is, the original igneous rocks). These are: a) chemistry of the rocks concerned b) PIT conditions of metamorphism c) P during H20 metamorphism. These are now discussed below....

218 4.16.2 Variables affecting metamorphic assemblages

In an attempt to relate mineralogical variations to whole rock chemistry use was made of the results of the experimental study by Green and Ringwood (196j') of the chemistry and mineralogy of tholeiitic rocks. Lack of adequate mineralogical data for all analysed samples from North Harris made a detailed study of the possible Interrelationships difficult but some conclusions could be drawn from the available data. Green and Ringwood suggested that mineral assembl- ages produced in rocks of tholeiitic composition were predominantly controlled by the temperature and pressure under which they were formed, as is shown somewhat diag- rammatically in fig:4.28a. For any given temperature the. stability fields of various phases can be drawn, for a range of pressures, such as is shown in fig:4.28b for a temperature of 1100°C. (In this diagram it can be seen that assemblages typical of the North Harris hornblende granulites, ie. opx-cpx-garnet-plag and opx-cpx-plag, could be produced at 15kb at this temperature. At lower temperatures lower pressures would be needed, as is suggested in fig:4.28. See below). In addition to such relationships it was also shown that the assemblages produced at any given temperature and pressure are greatly affected by chemical factors, particularly those indicated by the Mg/Fe and Ca/Na ratios; for example garnet was produced at lower pressures in rocks with low Mg /Fe ratios. Thus an attempt was made to correlate mineralogy and chemistry using both the general chemistry of the various rock groups (divided according to mineralogy) and the Mg/Fe and Ca/Na ratios. In all three no correlation was seen to exist between chemistry and assemblage; all groups were similar in composition regardless of mineral type, and each mineral species was found to be developed over a wide range of ratio values. It would therefore appear that, in the North Harris rocks at least, there is no influence of chemistry over mineralogy.

219 30

Gnt-pyxn-qtz 25

P kb. 20 Gnt-plag-p xn

15 ••• yo•••

Pyxn-plag

10

800 900 1000 1100 1200 TOG

Fig:4.28 Stability fields of tholeiitic assemblages (after Green and Ringwood, 1967)

rutile ore curl quartz

diopside

hyperstene •diopside+ jadeite

anorthite ss almandine pyrope -RAG' garnet albite ss

—5.1.04silne 5 10 15 '20 25 30 P kb

Fig:4.28b Tholeiitic assemblages at 1100°C and varying P kb (From Green and Ringwood)

220 b) P/T conditions of metamorphism

In Chapter 5 (section C) various estimates of the temperature and pressure of Laxfordian metamorphism are obtained from the various metamorphic assemblages of the Scourie Dykes. Although it would be premature to give any details of the methods used and results obtained it is shown that the assemblages were produced at a temperature of some 750°C and at 6-7kb pressure, estimates which agree quite well with those made by Dearnley (1973) and Dickinson and Watson (1976), the latter for a variety of locations in the Outer Hebrides (see Chapter 6). A further approach to the estimation of these parameters makes use of the data of Green and Ringwood (1968), given in fig:4.28. The stability fields of various tholeiitic assemblages with respect to pressure and temperature are shown in fig:4.28a, the extrapolation made in the diagram (indicated by the dashed lines) suggesting a pressure of some 14kb (at 750°C) for the formation of garnet-pyroxene-plagioclase assemblages, typical of the amphibolites of North Harris. The position of these rocks on the olivine-normative / quartz- normative divide of the basalt tetrahedron (fig:4.13) also suggests pressures of 10kb for the formation of two-pyroxene assemblages and it seems clear from these various estimates, however crude, that P/T-conditions can be, adequately defined. The general agreement of such estimates, and the absence of large variations in P/T estimates based on mineral assemblages in amphibol ites from widely scattered sites suggests that these parameters were fairly constant over a large part of Laxfordian metamorphic history and over the region as a whole. It therefore seems unlikely that the variations in metamorphic assemblages can be ascribed to variable P/T conditions from area to area.

221 j Variations in P H20

De Weard (1965) regarded the role of water as vital in the understanding of the development of assemblages in high-grade metamorphic rocks. In his scheme high PN20

leads to the production of hornblende granulites rather than anhydrous forms, while variations in load pressure exert overall control of the assemblage produced. He also ascribed intermixing of subfacies assemblages (such as is seen in North Harris amphibolites, especially in larger masses) to local variations in

In Chapter 2, variations in Laxfordian strain were suggested, areas of relatively low deformation occuring in the north and north-east while in the Tarbert region flattening and deformation was considered to indicate more intense deformation (fig:2.12). In keeping with these features certain basic and ultrabasic rocks of the low deformation ares exhibit relict assemblages and textures and most amphibol ites occur as rather large (if folded) units, whereas in the Tarbert area small, flattened lenses of simple amphibolite are the norm and some unusual fabrics are occasionally developed in the mafic layers. In Chapter 3 were described the regional distributions of granitic rocks, bulk chemical variations and the variations in volatile contents of thegreygneisses. Of these it is the variations seen in the volatile contents of the gnefsses which yield the most interesting corr- elations with zones of granitic rocks, variable deform- ation and so on, and it would appear that in the distribution of volatiles one Finds the clue to the chief controlling factor in Laxfordian tectono-metamorphic history. As was suggested in Chapter 3 it is likely that the volatile-rich areas were devioped during metamorphism and indicate regions of relatively high possibly H2O' relating originally to the development of a zone of granitic rocks in Late Scourian times (as suggested in West Harris by Myers). If produced at such an early period (as seems likely) then the influence of P on H2O the development of t -e various metamorphic assemblages

222 could have been felt throughout scheme (2) of metamor- phic reactions suggested above, with the preservation in areas of relatively low volatile concentrations of the original assemblages and the production of the hornblende granulites.

Section E: General conclusions

1) The intrusive igneous rocks of the region can be divided into four groups: (a) altered pre-Scourie Dyke ultrabasic rocks (b) orthopyroxene-olivine ultrabasic rocks of Maaruig (c)'noritic basic rocks (d) amphibolites of various types

2) The Maaruig rocks exhibit a primary layered sequence, with whole rock and mineral chemistry exhibiting systematic variations through such a sequence. Their textures and mineralogy are original. Analysis of the whole rock element ratios by the methods of Pearce shows the anticipated igneous history of co-precipitation of orthopyroxene and olivine; the calculated compositions of these fractionating phases are identical to the compositions of the analysed samples, showing the minerals to be preserved more or less unaltered. At the top of the sequence plagioclase. appears as an interstitial phases, but the rock remains thoroughly ultrabasic in character; no basic rocks are seen in ass- ociation with this complex.

3) The basic norites exhibit igneous textures and miner- alogies but their occurence is very locallised and their original extent unknown. Pearce plot analysis shows them to have been produced by co-precipitation of orthopyroxene and plagioclase(as anticipated); the calculated orthop- yroxene composition compares quite closely with that analysed, showing it to be preserved intact. Lack of suitable data prevents the plagioclase composition being calculated but it is likely that the analysed plagioclase (andesine-labradorite) also represents the original

223 mineralogy. These rocks grade into typical amphibolites but such a change involves chemical changes so great as to render uni ikely the possibMty of these rocks being the common precursor of the majority of the amphibolites. It seems likely that these noritic rocks are related to the Maaruig ultrabasics by virtue of their both being orthopyroxene-bearing and produced by orthopyroxene fractionation. (see (1+), below). k) The amphibolites consist mainly of, two. groups: (a) simple amphibolites (b) ci inopyroxene-amphibol ites Orthopyroxene is a widespread, but not common, phase. Two pyroxene 'hornblende granulite' assemblages are occasionally encountered. Garnet is irregularly developed. Pearce plots show that the precursors of these rocks were produced by the precipitation of ci inopyroxene and plagioclase; as such they differ markedly from the ortho- pyroxene bearing rocks which leads to the suggestion that the latter represent a minor development of norites in the Scourie Dyke suite of intrusives.

5) The overall geochemistry of these rocks is that typical of continental tholelites, the majority plotting as under- saturated divine-normative rocks in the basalt tetrahedron. The linear trends of the Pearc& plotš suggests that metamorphism was to a large extent isochemical. This general tholelitic chemistry leads to the suggestion that these rocks were derived by partial melting of upper mantle material at depths of 35-!4Okm. On emplacement their mineralogies would have developed at pressures of some 10kb.

6) Metamorphism of the original igneous rocks led to the development of the various assemblages, whose mineral chemistry can be used to determine PIT conditions of Laxfordian metamorphism. Temperatures of some 750°C and 6-7kb pressure are estimated on this basis.

224 Chapter 5

Mineral chemistry of the basic and ultrabasic rocks

4

'Calculation is hothing but cookery' Lord Brougham

225 Chapter 5

Contents

Introduction 227 Section A: Mineral chemistry 5.1 Olivines 228 5.2 Orthopyroxenes 232 5.3 Clinopyroxenes 234 5.4 Garnets 239 5.5 Amphiboles 242 5.5.1 Classification 5.5.2 Element variations with respect to rock group 5.5.3 Element variations within amphiboles 5.6 Plagioclase 245 5.7 Oxides 246 5.7.1 Spinel 5.7.2 Chromite 5.7.3 Ilmenite Section B: Distribution of elements between coexisting phases 249 5.8 Ferromagnesian minerals 249 5.9 Hornblende-plagioclase 253 5.10 Summary 253 Section C: Temperature and pressure estimation 5.11.1 Cpxn- Opxn- Garnet (Wood and Banno., 1973) 257 5.11.2 Opxn- Cpxn (Kretz, 1963) ' 260 5.11.3 Cpxn- Garnet (Rgheim, 1974) 261 5.11.4 Pyxn- Ilmenite (Anderson et al, 1972) 261 5.11.5 Cpxn- Garnet (Mysen and Heier, 1972) 264 5.11.6 Hornblende (Reese, 1974) 264 5.12 Summary and conclusions 267

226 Chapter 5

Introduction

Mineral analyses were made using polished thin sections on both the 'Geoscan' electron-microprobe in the Geology Department of Imperial College and on the semi-automated solid state 'microprobe in the Department of Mineralogy and Petrology, Cambridge University (where the assistance of Norman Charnley and Dr. Long is gratefully acknowledged)., A total of some three hundred individual analyses of the major mineral phases were made from selected amphibolites, hornblende- granulites, noritic rocks and the ultrabasic rocks of Maaruig and Tarbert. All analyses have been recalculated to oxide values and standard formulae calculated to the number of oxygen atoms used by Deer, et al (1963). Amphibole formulae have been calculated on a basis of 24 oxygen atoms although the precise water content is unknown. Iron is expressed as weight percent Fe0 and is so used in all calculations given in this chapter, but theoretical Fe203 values were calculated using the program 'Ferric' according to the method of Finger (1972). In fact few analyses yield any appreciable amounts of Fe203 using this method, but estimates are given in the appendix. Program Ferric also calculated end-member compositions. This chapter is divided into three parts, the first dealing with the chemistry of each mineral group, the second describing element distributions between the various coexisting phases and the third, taking these distributions further, dealing with the use of coexisting phases as geothermometers and 'barometers. In all the diagrams the symbols drawn below are used to distinguish the various sources of the analyses. It should be borne in mind thatmost of the analyses are of metamorphic minerals with the exception of the orthopy- roxenes of the noritic rocks and their associated phases as were described in Chapter 4.

227 Symbols used in the figures:

Amphibolites Hornblende-granulites

Noritic rocks (Ardvourlie) 0 (No 320, cpxn rock at margin) Maaruig Ultrabasics U UB south of Tarbert A

(These symbols are also used to identify analyses in the tables)

Section A. Mineral chemistry

5.1 Olivines

Olivines occur only in the layered ultrabasic complex of Maaruig and in the more altered ultrabasic lens south of Tarbert; they are abundant and relatively unaltered only in the former. In both bodies the olivines are magnesium-rich with a forsterite content of between 84.5% and 88.5% for the Maaruig olivines and 79% in the other unit (fig:5.1). The olivines of the Maaruig complex show ,systematic variations in composition through the sequence, as is described in Chapter 4 (see section 4.3 and fig:4.21). The only minor element in these olivines is manganese, shown relative to forsterite content in fig:5.2. The concentration is more or less constant and suffers little variation with repect to position in the sequence. The average composition of olivines from the two ultrabasic bodies are given in Table 5.1 and it may be seen that there are considerable differences between the two. The Fe/Fe + Mg ratio of the olivines shows no relationship with that of the host rock. In fig:5.3b the partitioning of Mg and Mn between olivine and ortho- pyroxene in these rocks is shown. Mg is shared equally between them while Mn is concentrated in the ortho- pyroxene, although the partitioning is regular. 0 A S10 40.50 39.80 FeO 13.95 20.19 MnO .01 .23 MgO 45.88 41.76

Tot: 100.33 101.76

• Table 5.1 Olivine compositions in the ultrabasic rocks.

0 A 0 0 +

SiO2 56.49 55.21 5k.63 51.66 51.28 TiO 2 - .001 .84 Al203 2,09 1.62 .85 .91 • FeO 8.99 12.73 16.26 31.91 32.06 MnO .13 .25 .25 .52 .39 MgO 32.10 29.53 26.05 15.78 15.32 CaO .69 .18 1.50 .56 .63 _ _ _ Na20 - - K20 - - - .003 - Cr205 .35 - .21 - - Total 99.57 99.98 100.73 100.56 100.59

Table 5.2 Orthopyroxene compositions

229 Wo

ST Fig:5 Plot of end member compositions of pyroxenes and olivines. The end members were calculated from the molecular percentages (recalculated to 100%) the method of Cawthorn, et al not being used M= Maaruig UB (M'= fldspathic UB) A= Ardvourlie norites HG= hornblende granulites S= Scourie Dyke amphibolites ST= UB south of Tarbert 0 • z

4-)

75 80 85 90 Mol% Forster Ito

FIy:5,2 Re1tionship between MnO .nd Fo content of oflvines

.05 .10

tin dtornS olivine

tlg atoms o1Ivin

Flg:5,3 0Ilvineopxn relationships in Maaruig UB () and Trhrt 4 5.2 Orthopyroxenes

Orthopyroxene is a common mineral in many basic and ultrabasic rocks of the region. It occurs as the only pyroxene in the ultrabasic and noritic assemblages and is seen with clinopyroxene in many amphibolites. The compositional variations are shown in fig:5.1 while the mean compositions of the orthopyroxenes from each rock group are given in Table 5.2. All have very low CaO contents and plot near the En-Fs tie-line. The orthopyroxene of the ultrabasic rocks Js highly magnesian with over 80% En while that of the amphibolites has an En content of some 40-50%. The noritic rocks fall roughly in between. The orthopyroxene of the amphibolites would thus be classed as hypersthene and the others as bronzites. The most calcic orthopyroxene found is that of the feldspathic ultrabasic rock at the top of the Maaruig succesion. The orthopyroxenes of this complex show systematic compositional variations through the sequence, as described in Chapter 4 (see fig:4.21). In the large orthopyroxenes of both the Maaruig and the noritic rockscolour variations suggestive of zoning are visible. Traverses made across. individual crystals show zoning to be either highly irregular or absent. Where some irregular zonation can be seen the centres of the crystal have higher Al, Cr and lower.Si, the other elements being quite variable. It is of considerable interest to ascertain whether the orthopyroxenes are of purely metamorphic origin or representing an original igneous phase (even if recryst- allised). Petrological and other evidence presented in Chapter 4 suggests that the orthopyroxenes of the Maaruig and noritic assemblages are indeed original. Fig:5.4 shows a plot of weight percent CaO against total iron; the line on the diagram is taken from Howie and Smith (1966) as the upper limit of CeO concentration in metamorphic orthopyroxene. Fig:5.4b shows a plot of weight percent A1 203 against (FeO MgO) suggested by Bhattacharyya (1971) as a method of distinguishing igneous and metamorphic orthopyroxenes. The noritic orthopyroxene plot in the igneous fields of both diagrams while the

232 2.)

0 2.0

VI 0 1.5 VI 0 0

VI 0

1 . 0 Upper limit of • metfic opxn

• •+ 0 .5

00 au AA A %CM

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Wt %-Fe0

(Howie and Smith, 1966)

metamorphic

1 igneous

0 1 2

Wt % A1 203

(Ghattacharyya, 1971)

F i Division of orthopyroxenes into metamorphic and igneous types on the basis of their composition.

233 Maaruig pyroxenes are only distinguished as igneous in the Al v. (Fe±Mg) plot. This discrepancy is most likely due to the failure to analyse-very fine exsolution lamellae of calcic pyroxene which would therefore lead to a false lower CeO content in the analyses and thus place the minerals within the metamorphic field. All õrthopyroxenes from amphibolites and hornblende-granulites plot well within the metamorphic fields of both diagrams. That the Iron content of the orthopyroxenes is dependent on the Fe/Fe + Mg ratio of the host rocks is shown in fig:5.5a, the Fe/Mg ratio of the mineral always remaining below that of the' host rock:

5.3 Cl inopyroxenes

Cl inopyroxene is an abundant mineral in the amph- ibolites of the region but iscompletely lacking in the ultrabasft and noritic assemblages. Most of the analyses of cflnopyroxenes presented here are used in conjunction with orthopyroxene data in P/I estimations. The composition of the cflnopyroxenes are shown in terms of end-members in fig5.1 and the mean compositions given in Table 5.3. From fig:5.l they may be seen to be salites rather than diopside. The scatter on this diagram relates to variations between iron and magnesium content with.respect to a constant calcium concentration. In addition to such variations several. elements show a relationship with iron content (fig:5.6). These relations can be summarised as a) 41203 and CaO show strong negative correlations with Fs b) Na2O and MnO show slight negative correlations with Fs c) hO2 remains constant. The iron contents of the clinopyroxenes are them- selves dependent on the Fe/FE + Mg ratio of their host rocks (fig:5.5b) the Fe/Mg ratio of the mineral always being below that of the host rock.

234 cc;

1S014 Ji6H4 pu sUZXOJAd @i14 Jo soLleJ 61,q/z)j uoamaci dp4suo!lv[zqi s - 5:6!„;

(Fe/Fe + Mg) opxn

Ui

cu

• (Fe/Fe + Mg) cpxn

Ui

cr

! AdQu OJ ux + Sf02 52.02 51.77 fl02 .11 .08 A1 203 1.80 1.65 FeO 12.39 12.54 MnO .16 .21 MgO 11.22 11.03 CaO 22.05 22.18 Na20 .10 .29 K20 - .03 Cr205 - -

Total 99,85 99.77

Table 5.3 Cl inopyroxene compositions: hornblende granulites and amphibolites.

S102 40.92 38.88 39.13 A1 203 23.16 21.78 22.03 FeO 19.67 29.79 28.8k MnO .90 1.30 1.11 MgO 9.03 2.99 3.69 CaO 6.35 7.09 7.22 K20 .08 -

Total 100.11 101.80 101.03

Table 5.4 Garnet compositions. Those of the norites occur in coronas around the orthopyroxenes

236 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 21 26 28

Es % in cpxn

.8

.4 0 r\)

6 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

Es % in cpxn

Fg:5,6 Re1t:ionships between conter nJ compoition In cl inopyroxenes. 237

0 0 0

0 0 • AP— • • 0 0* • • • 0 • 0 N.) • • .170. it 0 le 00 4,0

44-

6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

Fs % cpxn

.7 .6

. 5 rt

4 1+ 0 .3

2

2 4 6 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 Fs % in cpxn ig .3r •- continued

238 5 -i Garnets

Garnet is a common constituent of the metamorphic assemblages of Oe basic rocks but it is only in the hornblende-granulites were they could be said to truly coexist with other phases, generally showing some degree of alteration in other rocks.

A theoretical Fe203 value has been calculated for the garnet analyses using program Ferric. In many analyses the method could not be applied and even when calculated the maximum value of Fe203 is less than .5% The end-member molecules were calculated directly from mol% Mg, Fe, Ca and Mn and these are plotted in fig:5.7 with.. MgO (pyrope), FeO (almandine) and CaO (grossular) recalculated to 100%. The almandine and pyrope components dominate the composition with an approxim- ate ratio of Al:Py= 7:1. The close grouping of the garnet compositions seems due to their being produced in rocks of similar composition under homogeneous metamor- phic conditions. The more Mg-rich points on the diagram are garnets from the coronas around orthopyroxene in the noritic assemblages and owe their 'unusual' composition to being derived from such magnesium-rich phases. They have an Al:Py ratio of some 4:1. In general the grain size of the garnets was too small to permit a systematic study or possible zoning. Table 5.4 summarises the cempositional features of garnets from each group. The Al:Py ratio (ie. Fe/Mg) of these minerals is, as in the other ferromagnesian phases, apparently dependant on the Fe/Fe + Mg ratio of the equivalent host rock (fig:5.8a). However the garnets have an Fe/Mg ratio higher than that oF their host rocks.

239

I

Py

Al r

Fg:5.7 Garnet compostiors plotted in terms of their a1mandine-pyrope-grosu1ar end members. Those marked as 'naritic 1 occur in coronas around orthopyroxenes.

(Fe/Fe + Mg) amphiboles

N U ~' M N

SO

tl1

N ROCK ST O H

) Mg + Fe o / Fe (

LA

N iJ w C L M C7

(0 v N œ n LA - M . . • • . (Fe/Fe + Mg) garnets

Fig:5.8 Relationship between Fe/Mg ratios of garnets and amphiboles and their host rocks.

241 5.5 Amphiboles

Amphiboles are ubiquitous in the basic and ultra- basic rocks of the region. In a mineral species with such a complex chemistry as the amphiboles several classificatory schemes can be applied of which two are presented here.

• 5.5.1 Classification

Using the definitions of Leake (1968) all analysed amphiboles can be classed as 'calcic'- ie. with greater than 1.5 atoms of Ca per half unit cell, calculated on the basis of 24 oxygen atoms. Leake's classification cannot, however, be applied to the amphiboles discussed here for most have greater than 2.5 atoms of (Ca+Na+K) per half unit cell. Fig:5.9a is a plot of tetrahedral Al against (Na+K) • for all analysed amphiboles. The number of A1 4 atoms is obtained by adding Al to Si until eight tetrahedral atoms are obtained. Reference points for ideal tremolite, edenite, tschermakite and pargasite are shown. The dashed lines indicate the comppsitional limits of hornblendic amphiboles suggested by Deer, et al (1963). In fig:5.9b the amphiboles are further classified using a diagram first presented by Ernst and later modified by Windley and Smith (1974) to incorporate K and Mn and disregard ferric iron which cannot be accurately assesed. The diagram serves to classify the amphiboles in terms of pargasite and tremolite end- members and their iron-rich equivalents and is similar to that used by Miyashiro (1973). The features shown by these diagrams for amphiboles from each rock group have been described in Chapter 4.

5.5.2 Element variations with respect to rock group

That there is considerable variation in amphibole compositions from one group to another may be seen in figs:5.9a and b, and also in Table 5.5. From this table

242

Tschermaki te Pargasi te 2.0k / / 0 0 / + .Ç.•+ +0 So / t.

4 0 Eden ite 0 0 p ‚:1 /

Tremolite 05 1.0 (Na + K) atoms

pargas i te ferropargas te N *9

.8

.7 - vJÇ3 0 ti . a, .6 -

*5

.3

A

A ferro- tremol ite .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 •1 •3 .2 .1 tremolite Niggfl Mg (Mg/Mg + Fe + Mn)

Fig:5,9 Classification schemes for amphiboles. C 243 ❑ o + ® o Si02 46.75 44.93 42.46 43.25 46.71 Ti02 .65 1.35 1.75 1.78 .38 A1203 10.22 12.67 11.97 11.81 12.03 FeO 4.54 8.21 19.48 18.76 6.98 MnO .01 .29 .22 - .11 MgO 18.64 14.86 8.14 8.81 17.42 CaO 12.12 12.03 11.31 11.40 11.65 Na20 1.85 1.65 1.21 1.30 1.91 1( 20 .33 1.01 1.11 .87 - Cr 205 1.24 .47 - .03 .16 Total, 96.42 97.45 97.63 97.64 97.45

Table 5.5 Amphibole compositions

❑ o + Si02 54.80 54.44 57.43 56.39 A1203 27.90 29.57 27.80 28.31 Fe0 1.23 .07 .17 .22 MgO 1.70 .02 - - Ca0 6.0 11.73 ā, 8.64 10.02 Na20 6.60 4.46 585 5.34 1(20 .14 - .02 .02 Cr205 .07 - - - Total 98.74 100.29 99.87 100.29 An/ 56 59 46 54

Table 5.6 Plagioclase compositions

244 of average compositions several features emerge: a) FeO is lowest in the ultrabasic amphiboles, increasing in the noritic assemblages, hornblende-granulites and, finally, the amphibolites. b) MgO shows an inverse relationship to FeO c) Ti02 increases from the ultrabasic to basic rocks and is highest in the hornblende-granulites- a feature described by Binns (1969) d) Cr205 relates to host rock composition, occuring in ultrabasic and noritic rocks only. e) Other elements are more variable. '

5.5.3 Element variations within amphiboles

That linear relationships exist between elements in amphiboles from the same paragenetic province was shown by Kostyuk and Sobolev (1969), work that has been sub- stantiated by further studies (eg. Windiey and Smith, 197'+). Fig:5.10 shows various interelement relationships and reveals strong correlations between FeO and MgO and FeO and h O2. Insufficient data is available on MnO,. few amphiboles having any MnO at all. AA plot of Cr205 against FeO segregates the amphiboles according to their host rock. Little c.,rrelatizn exists between SiO2 and A1203 which is somewhat surprising as Al would normally be expected to be negatively correlated with Si.

The Fe/Fe + Mg ratios of the amphiboles are dependant on host rock compositions (fig:5.8b). All Fe/Mg ratios for the minerals are below those of their host rocks.

5.6 Plagioclase

Full analyses of plagioclase were carried out in the majority of the samples, including the interstitial plagioclase of the uppermost rocks of the Maaruig complex (see Chapter 4).and the mean compositions are given in Table 5.6, together with the range and average An content (in mol%). Little K20 is present in analysed samples, the

245 O O 0

a

• • a ti aA Q cA • O~

a O

42 44 46 .48

Wt % S i 02

2.5 Wt Cr205 2.0 O 2.0

0

0

.5 .5 .+ 0

10 15 20 25 Wt% Fe0 5 - 10 15 20 25

25 flg:5.10 Element variations in 20 amphiboles. S i02 v A1203 015 Ti02 v Fe0 ' Cr205 v FeO 10 Mg0 v Fe0 5

5 10 15 20 25 Wt % FeO 246 plagioclase of the Maaruig rocks having .9 mol% Or as the largest Or content of the area, and the plagioclase of an amphibolite having .46 mol% Or. The Maaruig plagioclase has a somewhat unusual composition with 1.2% FeO, 1.7% Mg0 and .07% Cr205 in addition to the high Or content. This interstitial, clouded plagioclase probably represents the residual liquid of the rocks after consolidation. Although the orthoclase content of these plagioclases is generally low the presence of antiperthites- for example in the noritic rocks at Ardvourlie- would indicate that these values may be somewhat unrepresentative of the true K20 content.

5.7 Oxides

5.7.1 Spinel

Green-black spinel is found in the ultrabasic rocks south of Tarbert, of which only three analyses were made. The colour and composition (see appendix) both suggest that the mineral is 'hercynite' but MgO is 13% and Cr 6% on average, both too high for hercynite s.s.

5.7.2 Chromite

Chromite is an important constituent`.. of the Maaruig assemblages where they contain up to 41% Cr205. As with the olivine and orthopyroxene of these rocks the compos- ition of the mineral varies through the sequence (see fig:4.21). In this figure the composition of the chromites of the uppermost rocks of the sequence are based on four rather variable analyses and may therefore be misleading. The relationship between Cr205 and other oxides is shown in fig:5.11. MnO, TiO2 and Fe0 show strong positive correlations with Cr205 while Mg0 and A1203 show strong negative correlations. Si02 and Cr205 appear to be unrelated.

247

Si02 . -.4

. . _ 1.0

Ti02 .

.5 MnO

. . • 0

. 40

30

• 20 A 1,_03 • • -10

- 40 . . FeO •.•. • - 30 . - 20 .

15

• 10

. 5 • - • • -S MgO •`•~ . 0 I •t . 25 30 35 40 45 Wt % Cr205

Fig:5.11 Element variations in chromites (Maaruig UB).

248 5.7.3 llmenite

Average compositions of ilmenites from these rocks are given in Table 5.7 and the relationship between 1102 and the other oxides presented in fig:5.12 in which

TiO2 shows strong positive correlation with MnO and Mg0 and strong negative correlation with FeO. As in the chromites SiO gives no correlation at all. 2

Coexisting ilmenites and pyroxenes are used in section C to determine the temperature of formation of the assemb- lages using the method of Anderson et al (1972).

r

Section 8: Distribution of elements between coexisting phases

In fig:5.13 the Fe/Mg distribution between the various ferromagnesian minerals is shown. From this diagram the order of partitioning of magnesium in these phases is clinopyroxene, amphibole, orthopyroxene, olivine and, finally, garnet. Orthopyroxene and amphibole seem similar in their affinity for the elements. From the diagram it is also evident that the Fe/Mg ratios of the amphiboles is commonly strongly correlated, and hence controlled, by the composition of the earlier phases from which it has been derived- orthopyroxene and olivine in the ultra- basics and clinopyroxene of the amphibolites. Neither garnet nor amhibolite clinopyroxene show correlation of Fe/mg with the amphiboles, possibly due to their being purely' metamorphic phases. The distribution coefficients of iron and magnesium in the pyroxenes and garnet are used in section C to determine the possible P/T conditions under which the assemblages were produced. The distribution of Ca, Al and Ti between coexisting ferromagnesian phases is shown in fig:5.14, (few samples contain Mn or Cr and they are not shown): a) Al shows strong positive correlations between amphibole and all ferromagnesian phases b) Ca shows strong positive correlations between amphibole

249 o a + Si02 .58 .82 .54 Ti02 54.77 51.27 50.46 A1 203 - .08 - Fe0 43.93 47.16 48.42 MnO .44 .24 .31 MgO 2.55 .1+4 .12 Cr205 - .02 - Total 102.27 100.03 99.85

Table 5.7 Ilmenite compositions

1.0 •a• •• a • •• 4 • • • •a 5 • • a • Si02 %

• 149 • • , • •• 1+ 8 •• • \ • • t+7 •• 46 FeO % •• 45 44

• 3.0 •

Mg0 2.0

1 ,0 • O • • a

5 MnO' % • •°

o •

....--:----f-:s:------'•

50 55 Wt % TiO2

Fig:5.12 Element variations in ilmenites.

251

o garnet O orthopyroxene .9 clinopyroxene 0 ✓ 1 I • olivine 1 1P 1 ' ►1 01 1, g' 1 a 1

1 i ~ i i I 11 I I II 1 1 11 I 11, I 1 1 I 1 I , I I I I I I I ' I I , I

.7 I I I ►

ls 1 1 1 I I il I 1 1 I II I 1111 I I I i i ii I I

inera I 111I I .6 1 1 11 I ► 1 m Jill I n II I a

ia ' I ~ ' 1 Ii

s QI ni[1 I I 1 I~ I ►

ne I' I I 11II 1 11 I I 1 I I .5 s 1 I I II I mag i 1 /I I 11 II II ro III 1I I ill II I fer I 1I ', I D .4 Ipp p 0 0 non--gnt i ferous and UB rocks

v Lt- A

.2 I :,Y I ^M

.2 .3 .5 .6 .8 (Fe/Fe + Mg) amphibole

Fig:5.13 Fe/Mg distribution in ferromagnesian minerals

Tie-lines indicate coexisting phases.

252

O/ 0 i 0,/' 2 .5 d i> 2.5- / Ea AA i ro /A Ota d A © 2.0 ~'A A / p 2.0- a~ s i ro -. d .02 .04 .06 .08 .10 1.9 2.0 2.1

4 opxn Al atoms garnet Al atoms lp Cpxn

1

le 2.0 - A 2.0

hibo AA A

mp A A a s 1.9 1.9 m to

a 0

1.8 A 1.8

1 -- .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0

Ca atoms opxn (o garnet Ca atoms a Cpxn

ro 0 .22 v D a E . Pc ro 0 .21 fl `~ ci v►E 0 ro .20 .001 .002 .003 .004

Ti atoms Cpxn C ,'n opxn

Fig;5.14 Element distributions between amphiboles and other ferromagnesian phases.

252 a and clinopyroxene and garnet but none at all with ortho- pyroxene c) Ti shows weak negative correlations between amphibole and clinopyroxene d) Where strong correlations exist the ratios between amphibole and each ferromagnesian phase are the same

5.9 Hornblende-plagioclase

The distribution of Al, K and Na between hornblende and plagioclase is shown in fig:5.15; the distributions of Al and Na are erratic while K shows a strong positive correlation.

5.10 —Summary

The distributions of elements between coexisting phases involve a range of rock types, some with relict igneous minerals and others with almost totally metam- orphic assemblages. Interelement correlations between phases thus relate to both the original igneous features (such as the partitioning of Fe, Mg and Mn between olivine,and orthopyroxene in the Maaruig rocks) while others are wholly metamorphic in origin (such as the Ca distribution between clinopyroxene, garnet and amphibole). -- 0 Control of the compositions, of the metamorphic phases by the minerals they replace is also clear- for example the Mg-rich garnets or amphiboles derived from ortho- pyroxenes in the noritic rocks. The whole rock chemistry also exercises considerable influence over the compos- ition of the ferromagnesian phases, an influence particularly well exhibited in the Fe/Mg ratios of the minerals and their hosts.

253

i 0 2.6

2.5

2.4 ai

.00 2 3

} •0 c. 2.2 E E O (0 • 2.1 0 2.0

1.9 0

41. 1 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Mol% An plag.

.10 U + .08- ✓ Eo Co 4-1 .06 03.4. .04 se

40 45 50 55 60 65 70

.20 0 .0 -~ .18 • .16 o . + 0 + E m O z .14 ▪o + .12 zm 40 45 50 55 60 65 70

Mol% Ab plag.

Fig:5.15 Element distributions between amphiboles and plagioclase.

256 Section C: Temperature and pressure estimation

5.11.1 Clinopyroxene-orthopyroxene-garnet

Using the data of Green and Ringwood (1970) and simple mixing models of orthopyroxene-clinopyroxene and ortho- pyroxene-garnet solid solutions allows the extrapolation of experimentally determined equilibria into uninvestigated • P/T regimes. Using such models equations can be produced from which the conditions of equilibration of naturally occuring phases can be calculated (Wood and Banno, 1973; see also Wood and Fraser, 1976). The methods of obtaining both parameters are outlined here rather than in an appendix.

Temperature determination is based on the following relationship between temperature and the (Fe-Mg) distribution of clinopyroxene and orthopyroxene: ~r

T K= -10202 ln cpx + 3.88 ° aopx 7.65[X ] Xop2 x - k.6

where: aopx = [x.xM9] cpxn ,

a°px = {x.xMg2] '3pxn

and Xōpx= (Fe/Fe + Mg) opxn

To make use of this equation some method of allocating elements to the various pyroxene sites (tetrahedral, and octahedral Ml and M2). The allocation is made as follows, a method which is a modification of that of Wood and Banno and for which thanks are due to D.Buchannan and R.Horsley for discussion.

The method is first presented in the form of brief notes and an example of the technique shown, using data of a sample of amphibolite.

257 Ca-poor pyroxene a) All Na is placed in M2 and equal amounts of Ti and Al placed in Ml and tetrahedral sites b) Remainder of Ti placed in M1 and equal amount of Al in the tetrahedral site c) The remaining Al is divided equally between the M1 and tetrahedral sites d) All Ca, Mn go into M2. e)• Fe and Mg are distributed according to:

Ml H XFe and Mg 1 + XMq 1 + XFe XFe XMg where: XMg = total Mg ions in formula

XFe = total Fe ions in formula H total ions in Ml (Total ions in Ml are calculated by subtracting the Si and tetrahedral site ions from formula total and dividing by two) .

Ca-rich pyroxene a) All Ti placed in Ml and equal. amounts of Na and Al in the M2 and tetrahedral sites b) Remaining Na in M2 and equal amout of Al in Ml c) Remaining Al divided equally between M1 and tetrahedral sites d) Remaining elements distributed as in d and e, above.

An example of this procedure using orthopyroxene and clinopyroxene of an amphibolite (No. 134) is presented below:

258 Sample 134: amphibolite Opx Cpx Na Mg .884 .628 Opx Al .041 .059 M2 M1 let Si 1.987 1.975 Al .0205 Al .0205 K Ca .023 .919 px Ti M2 M1 Tet Cr Al .0295 Al .0295 Mn .013 .004 Fe 1.046 .411 `Hopx- (3.993-(.0205+l.987))/2 m.9723 3.993 3.995 H~px- (3.995-(.0295+l.975))/2 -.9658

0 PX C PX M2 Ml M2 M1 Fe .5191 Fe .5269 Fe .02898 Fe .38202 Mg .4387 Mg .4453 Mg .04272 Mg .58373 Ca .023 Al .0205 Ca .919 Al .0295 Na Ti Na Ti Mn .013 Mn .004 .9938 .9927 .99468 .99525

Then:

a~px - .02518 aopx - .19802

XFeopx - .54197

Thus, by the equation given above:

T - 10550K - 782°C

Using this method an average temperature (based 'on all estimations) for the formation of these assemblages of 791°C ±28 was obtained.

259

C-

Using the data calculated for the orthopyroxene sites the pressure at which orthopyroxene and garnet equil- ibrated can be derived using the following formula:

opx opx M2 2 Ruin {x 1 ] [x]Mg [X 9j opx . + 4207 - 2.691 pbar ~` 1 XGt 3 Mg

Vr

whe re: R gas constant u temperature Vr t change in partial molar volumes

Vr can be obtained from the data given by Wood and Banno (1973) and Wood (1974). The value must be divided by 41.84 to normalise units between partial molar volumes and the gas constant. Using this equation an average pressure of: 4.9 kb was obtained for the garnet-orthopyroxene assemblages.

a In a second paper Wood (1974) refined the above equation to take into account new data on Mg-systems. Using this model (which is not presented here) an average pressure of formation of these assemblages of 16 kb was obtained, a value which seems far too high- especially in the light of what follows, below. However such high pressures were established by Wood (1975) using these methods with the garnet bearing assemblages of the South Harris igneous complex (860°C, 13kb).

5.11 .2 Orthopyroxene-clinopyroxene

Coexisting orthopyroxene and clinopyroxene allow temperature estimates to be made following the methods of Kretz (1963). The distribution coefficient of iron and magnesium between the two is approximated by

260 /Fe) ffi (Mg opx K 0 (Mg /Fe) cpx

The values plotted in fig:5.16a suggest a temperature range of 640-820°C (mean= 710°C). in this diagram pressure affects are ignored but Kretz proposed the correlation between Kp and pressure shown in fig:5.16b in which the average K0 of .56 obtained in the North Harris rocks, allied with a temperature of 710°C suggests a pressure of 5 kb.

5.11,3 Clinopyroxene-garnet

Using a relatively simple distribution coefficient of iron and magnesium between garnet and clinopyroxene in eclogitic assemblages:

(FeO/MgO)gt Kp =. (Fe0/M90)cpx

Rāheim (1974) suggested the relationships between pressure, temperature and Kp shown in fig:5.17. Using these diagrams and a calculated (average) K© for the North Harris rocks of 6.8 estimations of the range of likely PIT conditions under which the assemblages were produced may be made. In fig:5.17a a K0 of 6.8 suggests a maximum temp- erature of 700°C at 20 kb, decreasing with reduced pressures, and a maximum pressure (at 700°C) of 15 kb. The interpretation of this diagram is, however, somewhat cyclic and fig:5.17b gives slightly more definite indications of PIT parameters. From this diagram a K0 of 6.8 suggests a pressure range of 4- 11 kb for the formation of 'garnet granulite' assemblages at temper- atures of between 620 and 700°C respectively.

5.11.4 Pyroxene-ilmeuite

An uncalibrated but nonetheless interesting method of temperature estimation based on the distribution of

261 -.2

-.3

.4 ln KD -.5

.6

.7

.6 .7 .8 .9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1/T x 103 °C

6

5 kb 5

4 average Kp= .56 T°C' 710 3 Pkb" 5 Pkb 2

1

.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0 1 /T x 103 °C

Fig;5.16 P-T determination using cpxn-opxn. (After Kretz,1963)

262

max. 700°C at 20kb .G 10 goo,. 6 ī s ftoo~ 4

1/1 °K

60

pressure range of 4-11kb 50 for Kp ' 6.8 (in gnt granulite) ~b 40

Pkb 30

20

10

200 400 600 800 1000 1200

T°C

Fig:5.17 P-T determination using garnet-cpxn. (After Rāheim, 1974)

263 iron and magnesium between orthopyroxene, clinopyroxene and ilmenite was suggested by Anderson et al (1972). 'F.ig:5.18 shows the relationship between K0(Fe-Mg) of cpx-ilmenite and opx-ilmenite on which the data of the North Harris rocks are plotted. For any given sample the cpx-ilmenite temperature estimate is higher by some 25-30°C. Average temperatures range from 565-635°C with estimates from the hornblende-granulites showing slightly higher temperaturesthan those of the amph i boH tes . The average temperature of 619°C is somewhat lower than those obtained by the methods that have been out- lined above,. but are not markedly at variance with them.

5.11.5 Clinopyroxene-garnet

Using various data Mysen and Heier (1972) suggested the relationship between K0(Fe-Mg) of garnet and clino- pyroxene and temperature shown in fig:5.19. The distribution coefficient is calculated in the same way as that of Rāheim (above), use of which in Mysen's calibration gives a temperature range of 583- 757°C and a mean of 670°C.

5.11.6 Hornblende

Raase (1970 showed that both the Al and Ti contents of hornblende could be used as indicators of the P/T conditions of regional metamorphism. That Ti increases with grade is well documented (eg. Binns, 1969) and has been shown to be the case in the amphiboles of the hornblende granulites of North Harris. Of particular interest here is the suggestion by Raase that octahedral Al could be used to define pressure limits for the conditions under which the mineral was formed. The results of this approach are shown in fig:5.20 in which the A1 6 content is plotted against Si, all data points falling above the 5kb delimiting line. While not in itself of great value the method does suggest relatively low pressures for the production of

264 2.5 800 700 600 500 ° i . .. a. . .. . 2.0

(Mq/Fe)pyxn (Mg/Fe)ilm

1.5 amph;bolites cr 'granuUtes' •

1.0 1.0 1.2 1.4 1000/T °K Fig:5.18 Estimate of temperature using ilmenite-cnxn/opxn. (After Anderson, et al; 1972)

10

8

6

K0 4

2

600 800 1000 1200 1°C

Fig:5.19 Estimate of temperature using garnet-cpxn. (After Mysen, 1972) 265 1 .1+ Al6 calculated on a half unit 1.2 \` cell based on 23 oxygens

1.0 ` Alb 8 \ • oo \ e .6 ~4f .4 o \ a \ ~~ .2 d

6.0 7.0 8.0 Si

Fig:5.20 Relationship between Alb content of amphiboles and pressure. (After Raase, 1974)

266 these assemblages, certainly well below the 16kb estimate using the method of Wood (1974).

5.12 Summary and conclusions

The various estimates of pressure and temperature made in this section are grouped together in Table 5.8 in which both the individual and average estimations are given. The overall average is some 700°C at 6-7kb. However a little thought as to what these figures actually indicate is called for. In Chapter 4 the various basic and ultrabasic rocks of the region were described and some indication given of the relative ages of the assemblages they exhibit (sometimes using the mineral chemistry discussed in this chapter).. The assemblages include those with many relict igneous features (eg. the noritic rocks; the Maaruig rocks), those with a mixture of relict and new minerals (eg. the amphiboles of most rocks are predominantly metamorphic) and those whose assemblages are wholly metamorphic (eg. the hornblende-granulites and amphibolites). in many cases reactions between various minerals was seen (such as garnet being pseudomorhed by feldspar-pyroxene aggregates) and, as was discussed in the final sections of the chapter, a sequence of metamorphic assemblages could be established. Thus it is from this admixture of assemblage types, with minerals of varying ages, that an attempt has been made to choose coexisting minerals for use in the P/T estimates. As may be appreciated such a choice was difficult. The purely metamorphic assemblages of the hornblende-granulites provided four of the eight samples used in most of_the methods, and the three amphibolites included were chosen because they appeared to show .stable metamorphic assemblages with little or no evidence of reaction or retrogression. The overall similarity between the P/T estimates of the two groups suggests that the choices were valid ones. The samples are all taken from the east of the r' region and are thus outside the area of granite and

267

.o in Raase (1974)

LA o n 10n °Lr~ ō 1 SA r- M oo Mysen + Heier (1972) r- -.0 •D r• IA Les r` 1/40 .o

c3 LA 0 0 LA 0 o r .- 1 -1- N. LA I 1 A 1/40 1/40 ` `° `O `°NNI Anderson (1972)

o eM O 1 CV LA N 1 N I-- LA LA .O 1D 1/40 1/40

0 4 t o 1 1 kb .o`~ ' • Raheimg (1974) c 700 610 to °C L w xi 0 • CL L!% Kretz (1963) (...) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o 4- N m r- 03 N_ 1 .- I- 1/40 .o CO r- *.o .o r- r`

.4- cs, M co LA LA I 1 \O ..a. Wood (1974)

.-. .,' 0, _° ""• °• 0 "• -t Wood + Banno (1973) n_ -4' yCV 4' N

L) N .- .4- 0 0 CO .- o_ aD ^ ~~ ro~ 1 1 a Wood + Banno (1973) es-

..1- LA N. CV LA N .- 0 C M t` N. \D IA N tQ r- N CV M M M

Table 5.8 Summary of PIT estimates and their results

268 •

pegmatite described in Chapter 3 (see fig:3.1) and there- fore free of the affects of the late Laxfordian period of granite production. As was described in Chapter 4, as far as the evidence of the basic and ultrabasic assemblages is concerned, Laxfordian metamorphism was a continuous process at amphibolite facies grade with only local evidence of low-grade conditions. The assemblages were produced at the t i me of major Laxfordian deformation (F2) and define the foliations that such tectonic activity produced in these rocks. Some evidence of slightly, lower-grade conditions exist in some retrogression of the earlier metamorphic phases (eg. garnet to feldspar-cpxn) in areas-of pegmatite production both in the main zone of granitic rocks and in smaller areas in the east (the locality of fig:4.2) but such correlations are not .really well defined. Thus the PIT estimates are believed to refer to the conditions pertaining at the peak of Laxfordian metamorphism with the hornblende- granulites indicating slightly higher temperatures of formation. Over the region as a whole, however, PIT conditions seem to have been fairly constant, .a feature that is discussed in Chapter 6.

269 Chapter 6

Conclusions

'This is the end of tears, no more lament' Sophocles

a

270

Chapter 6

Conclusions

6.1 The early complex 272 6.2 The Scourie Dykes 274 6.3 Laxfordian events 275 6.3.1 Tectonic episodes 6.3.2 Metamorphism 6.4 Regional variations in volatile concentrations 279 6.5 Regional summary 281

272 Chapter 6

Conclusions

The main conclusions drawn from each part of this work have already been stated in earlier chapters and are therefore not repeated in detail here. Rather, it is intended in this chapter to draw together only those conclusions which relate to the evolution of the Lewisian Complex in North Harris as a whole, or which are of general interest. Thus the chapter is d i v i ded • into sections concerning the early complex, the Scourie Dykes and the Laxfordianepisode, in each of which the principal regional conclusions are summarised.

6.1 The early complex

a) As aresult of the intensity of Laxfordian reworking only fragmentary evidence remains of the character of the early complex. There are no regions of very low Laxfordian strain in which the Scourian lithologies, mineral assemblages and structures are preserved unchanged, such as are recorded in northern Lewis (Davies, et al 1975), in the Southern Isles (Coward 1969) and on the mainland. The mineralogical and geochemical features of the present complex are characteristic of-those of the amphibolite facies and show no evidence of there having been granulite facies conditions -at any stage in the development of the complex. Nonetheless, being a gneiss complex indicates that high grade metamorphic conditions prevailed at some stage during the evolution of the area and there is some indication of a late Scourian metamorphic event in North Harris (see (e) below) as has been suggested elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides. •The absence in this region of evidence of metamorphic conditions at various stages in the evolution of the complex contrasts markedly with the South Harris igneous complex in which several phases of metamorphism, including granulite facies, can be recognised in the various mineral assemblages (eg.. Dickinson and Watson 1976).

272 b) The early complex in North Harris (dated at 2700my by Pidgeon and Aftalion, 1972) was therefore a banded gneiss complex of similar aspect to that exposed today. Myers (196$) suggested a classificatory scheme of.the gneisses based on the form and composition of the banding (fl g:2.1) and suggested 'trends of evolution' from one type to another during the progreesive effects of Laxfordian deformation, trends not always thought valid by the present author.

c) The precursors of the complex cannot be readily determined. Little metasedimentary or metavolcanic material now remains recognisable to suggest that such rock types formed a significant portion of the gneisses (from the metamorphism of a basement-cover sequence, for example) although it must be remembered that such relicts do occur in western Harris and the Southern Isles, a distribution possibly indicating original variations in the distribution of such rocks. The whole rock chemistry of the gneisses show them to be typically talc-alkaline, and chiefly of granitic and granodioritic composition, but fails to indicate whether the original rocks were plutonic (favoured by Lambert, et al 1975) or volcanic (Bowes 1971). In the absence of metasedimentary/volcanic relicts such as might be expected from volcanic associations it is possible that the complex was, in fact, derived by the metamorphism of a talc-alkaline plutonic series.

d) The present distributions of both mineral assemblage and geochemical variations in the gneisses show gross variations throughout the region (Chapter 3), defining a broad east-west belt of predominant biotite gneisses flanked by predominant hornblende-biotite gneiss belts, •such variations being reflected in the geochemical trends outlined by trend surface analysis. For reasons given earlier ( section 3.12) such distributions seem due to the preservation of some form of original lithological variations in the early complex rather than large-scale metamorphic processes (such as metasomatism). 273 A e) In addition to this east-west lithological zonation there exists a north-south belt of granitic rocks, distinguished both in the field and in the geochemical trends (figs:3.1 and 3.22). For reasons discussed in Chapter 3 and below (6.4) it is believed that this region of granites and pegmatites owes at least part of its origins to the development in late Scourian times of a region of volatile-rich gneisses (and granites ?), possibly contemporaneous with the development of late Scourian granitic rocks in western Harris (Myers 1968) and the period of late Scourian amphibolite facies meta- morphism in northern Lewis (Davies et ai 1975).

f) Within the early complex there occured basic and ultra- basic intrusive rocks of which the only remaining recognisable unit of any size is the ultrabasic lens south of Tarbert which is believed to predate the Scourie Dykes by virtue of its contrasting petrological and geochemical features,which are somewhat akin to those of layered ultrabasic complexes on the mainland, and the degree of deformation and alteration it exhibits. It is likely that a considerable part of the mafic banding, now an integral part of the complex, owes its origin to the presence of basic intrusions, now so deformed and metamorphosed as to be indistinguishable from basic bands produced by purely metamorphic processes.

6.2 The Scourie Dykes (see Chapter 4)

a) The early complex was cut by a suite of basic and ultra- basic rocks in a coherent swarm of intrusions (dykes ?) with consistent form and orientation. On structural grounds it has been suggested that the predominant trend of these intrusions was NE-SW and hence at some variance to the trend of Scourie Dykes seen else- where in the Outer Hebrides (eg. Great Bernera, Watson 1968) and on the mainland. A similar trend for the Scourie Dykes of west Harris was suggested by Myers (1968) and it may be that in the Outer Hebrides as _a whole the Scourie Dykes were emplaced over more or less the same time period as those of the mainland but with two orient-

274 ations, as has been reported in west Greenland.

b) The predominant rock type of North Harris Scourie Dykes is an olivine-normative tholeiite, produced by coprecipitation of clinopyroxene and plagioclase. The composition of these rocks in North Harris is remarkably Similar to that of Scourie Dykes in the Uig Hills (IGS data), elsewhere in the Outer Hebrides (eg. Dearnley 1962) and on the mainland (Burns 1966). Such similarity would suggest production of these rocks from one magma source and emplacement as a single swarm over a fairly short period of time.

c) A._much rarer component of the North Harris rocks is a suite of noritic basic and ultrabasic rocks, believed to be a very minor, contemporaneous, set of intrusions whose relationships with the Scourie Dykes in general are uncertain.

d) The metamorphic assemblages shown in the various amphibolites derived from the Scourie Dykes include the simple amphibolites (hornblende-plagioclase), 'hornblende- granulites' (two-pyroxene, plagioclase, amphibole, garnet) and clinopyroxene-amphibolites, these latter being the predominant type throughout the region. e) The present distribution and preservation of the. Scourie Dykes relates directly to the F2 phase of Laxfordian deformation.

6.3 .Laxfordian events

The Laxfordian episode in North Harris consisted of several phases of deformation taking place during pre- dominantly amphibolite facies metamorphism. Late in the period granitic rocks were developed and the episode culminated with local low grade retrogression and cataclasis.

275 • 6.3.1 Tectonic episodes

a) Three periods of deformation can be distinguished; a minor F1 phase of uncertain significance; a major F2 phase in which the majority of the structures and fabrics of the region were produced; and an F3 phase, the effects of'which were closely related to the distribution of granitic rocks. All three affected the pre-existing structures and banding of the early complex.

b) The major tectonic episode (F2) served to emphasise early banding while imposing an overall'NW-SE Laxfordian fabric on both the gneisses and Scourie Dykes. The numerous minor folds and major structures outlined by the Scourie Dykes, boudinaged basic layers and so on produced by this phase were described in Chapter 2.

c) Variations in the degree of preservation of the Scourie Dykes, together with features of their mineralogy and chemistry, allows the identification of areas of differing Laxfordian strain, the region as a whole being 'moderately' deformed but including within it areas of relatively 'high' and 'low' deformation (fig:2.12). Low deformation areas are defined by the following features: (1) Scourie Dykes are preserved as large, if folded, layers sometimes showing discordances with the the gneissic banding and, in certain cases, the preservation of original igneous textures and mineralogies. (2) The gneisses exhibit little regional variation, apart from the presence of andes i ne rather than oligoclase as the predominant plagioclase comp- osition. The pyroxene gneiss veins recorded by Jehu and Craig at Ardvourlie (1934) were not recorded, but would occur within a low deformation zone, in which such assemblages might be expected. The fabric variations (from L'S in areas of low deformation to SQL elsewhere) recorded by Davies et al (1975) are not seen in North Harris, planar fabrics being predominant in all structural regions. This predominance of planar fabrics could well be due to the original fabrics

276 . of the early complex being at low angles to the F2 plane of flattening (as is suggested in section 2.4.1 and fig:2.5), a situation which, if correct, would lead to the reinforcement of the planar fabric element even in areas of relatively low deformation. (3) There is a general correlation with the region of lower volatile contents of the gneisses shown in fig:3.26 (see 6.4 below).

An area of high deformation is seen at Tarbert, in which the following features are seen: (1) Scourie Dykes always occur as small lenses and boudins of amphibolite, in which simple amphibolite assemblages predominate. Occasional anomalous foliation types are developed in basic bands (fig:2.11). (2) The gneisses exhibit a strong NW-SE banding/foliation with few large fold structures; the banding dips almost exclusively to the SW. Such features would suggest extreme flattening of both the gneisses and the Scourie Dykes during deformation in this area. Shear zones, up to lOm wide, occur in the gneisses east of Tarbert and are a feature confined solely to this area. (3) There is a strong correlation between this area and a region of high volatile contents in the gneisses (see 6.4, below).

6.3.2 Metamorphism a) That amphibolite facies conditions were established at an early stage in Laxfordian history is evidenced by the F1 foliations being defined by amphibolite facies assemblages. Such conditions persisted throughout almost the whole of the period, waning only towards the closing stages of tectono-metamorphic history with subsequent locallised low grade retrogression and cataclasis- principally in the extreme south-east of the region.

277 b) While it seems likely that P/7 conditions varied to some extent during metamorphism, little evidence of such variation is actually seen. Estimates of P/T from mineral assemblages in the Scourie Dykes show a close grouping around an average of 750°C and 6-7kb, such estimates being based on a variety of assemblages (Chapters 4 and 5) in samples taken from localities throughout the region, but outside the region of granitic rocks. They therefore indicate quite uniform P/T conditions during what is considered to have been the 'plateau' of Laxfordian metamorphism. Comparison of such estimates with those suggested for other regions of the Lewisian Complex is made in fig:6.1 (after Dickinson and Watson, 1976) in which the P/T fields for the metamorphic assemblages in Scourie Dyke rocks of Lewis, Scourie and are shown together with those of the North Harris rocks. Little variation exists between them- with the exception of the Assynt estimates. One minor exception to this uniformity of P/T estimates in the North Harris rocks is provided by the hornblende- granulite assemblages which gave higher temperature estimates than did the amphibolites when using the pyroxene- ilmenite geothermometer (Chapter 5), but the absence of systematic correlations between this result and those obtained by other methods suggests that this feature is of little significance. With reference to the hornblende-granulites, Dearnley (1962,etc) used such assemblages as evidence of a wide- spread granulite facies metamorphism in the early Laxfordian, a suggestion leading to scheme (a) for the evolution of the mineral assemblages in the North Harris rocks given in section 4.16.1 in which early anhydrous assemblages are later retrogressed under amphibolite facies conditions. For reasons given in that section it is thought unlikely that such granulite facies conditions 'were widespread (if they occured at all) and a slightly more complex scheme of metamorphic reactions is suggested, based on amphibolite facies metamorphism (scheme (b)). in this system overall amphibolite facies conditions prevailed, with local higher grade (or drier) areas in which the hornblende-granulites were developed and original minerals

278

Kb NORTHERN LEWIS A

100 200

Kb /1 AS SY NT C % P/T fields for succesive metamorphic assemblages. The dotted area marks the field of the first met'io assemblages in Soourie Dykes (From Dickinson and Watson, 1976)

200 800 400 700 .00

10 T Fig: 6.1 Comparison between the P/T field estimated using the mineral assemblages of the North Harris Soourie Dykes 5 (Table 5.8) and those Kb of three other regions of Lewisian rooks. (Most estimates occur in the stippled area)

100 300 500 700 960

278a

• preserved. Later stages in metamorphism, possibly correlated with slight decrease in grade (eg. in areas of pegmatite production), created other metamorphic assemblages in certain amphibolites. As was discussed in section 4.16 the absence of chemical influences over the development of these assemblages and the lack of regional variations in P/T conditions leads to the suggestion of variations in PH2O (indicated by variations in volatile content of the gneisses) being the main influence over the reaction of these rocks to metamorphism,'

6.4 Regional variations in volatile concentrations

When data on the volatile contents of the gneisses- measured as loss on ignition during preparation of XRF samples (Appendix A), and composed mostly of water- is subjected to statistical contouring certain areas of the gneisses are seen to exhibit relatively high volatile concentrations (fig:3.26). Such areas include a north- south belt in the west of the region, and the Tarbert area- in which volatile concentrations are particularly high- such areas correlating markedly with regions in which granitic rocks and pegmatites are most fully developed (fig:3.l). As was suggested in section 3.14 such correlation may be explained as due to either the presence of a Scourian volatile-rich zone in which late Laxfordian granite development was facilitated, or to the presence of a late Scourian belt of granitic rocks in which high volatile contents were also developed. Which of these suggestions is actually the case cannot be said, representing something of a 'chicken-and-egg' situation, but it is possible that, as in western Harris (Myers, 196$) a late Scourian metamorphic episode involved the production of a belt of granitic rocks with associated high water content (see below).

The areas of relatively high volatile contents show correlation with the following features: (1) The area of high Laxfordian strain seen at Tarbert and thus, by implication, the various structural

279 •

features contained within it- shear zones, flattening of the gneisses, boudinage of the basic rocks, etc. (2) The predominance of simple amphibolite assemb- lages in the deformed Scourie Dykes. (3) The zones of granitic rocks, again particularly that seen at Tarbert.

To the east and north-east, where relatively low volatile contents are evidenced there is a general correlation with the areas of low Laxfordian strain and the related features of preserved igneous material, large remnants of Scourie Dykes and so on, as described above.

There is no correlation between the pattern of volatile concentrations and that of the gross lithological dist- ributions suggested in the gneisses (fig:3.2), once again emphasising the suggestion that such distributions owe their origin to original lithological variations in the early complex rather than to metamorphic processes.

On a purely phenomenological approach, therefore, there is considerable correlation between most of the regional features of Laxfordian deformation and metamo- rphism and the variations in volatile concentrations, a correlation which suggests that such variations represent the predominant influence over Laxfordian tectono-metamorphic events, the lack of regional variations in P/T conditions (Chapters If and 5) serving to emphasise this conclusion. As this influence of variable volatile concentrations was felt throughout the Laxfordian it would appear that such variations were established in the early complex and, as discussed in various sections of this work, it is likely that the feature was produced in a late Scourian episode of metamorphism and granite production, such as has been suggested in both northern Lewis (Davies et al, 1975) and western Harris (Myers 1968).

280 •

6.5 Regional sun'wnary

To summarise very briefly the general features of Lewisian history in North Harris and to indicate the overall similarities between North Harris and other regions of the Outer Hebrides the relevant points are given in Table 6.1 under various groupings. Further structural information may be found in Table 1.2. From Table 6.1 it can be seen that the overall tectonic and metamorphic evolution of Harris and Lewis varies only in detail from region to region and that, while the various research projects involved have had varying emphasis, such broad similarity would suggest that conditions and processes envisaged in any one region are likely to apply to the evolution of the complex as a whole.

'Nunc est bibendum' Horace

281 NORTH ,HARRIS WEST and SOUTH HARRIS LEWIS s

Looal development of granites Main phase of Laxfordian history Granites and peginatites locally and pegmatites in the west of the in these areas with massive day- developed, together with their region. 'In situ' granites only. elopment of granites and pegs' of F3 structures. F3 structures related to the various types. Early features are ocourence of these rooks. at least partially obliterated and F3 structures are widespread.

F2 deformation, principal phase F2 deformation produced folds of F2 main phase of Laxfordian def- of the region producing major all sizes, the largest being out- ormation with a general oriantat- foldx, many smaller structures. lined by Soourie Dyke fragments. ion of structures similar to that NW-SE foliations and axial-planes Widespread and various, F2 of North Harris but with flat- of folds dip to SW. Variations in structures are, nonetheless, lying fold axial planes and more ION Laxfordian strain suggested by subordinate to F3. Gneissio Poli- variable plunge. Relict structures features of the Scourie Dykes ation NW,SE. seen in areas of low Lax' strain. (structural/mineralogical). F1 folds (of Laxfordian age) are F1 folds a minor development. DEFORMAT F1 structures uncommon, hence of not recognised. unknown extent and dubious significance. Amphibolite facies metamorphism Amphibolite facies metamorphism seen in Laxfordian reworking of the j (700oc-6/7 kb). Local 'hot-spots' early complex. No data is available concerning PIT estimates. The give hornblende granulite assem- presence of granulite facies assemblages in some Scourie Dykes is not blages in the Scourie Dykes, but regarded as indicating an early granulite facies metamorphism. Structural and mineralogical an early phase of granulite facies o metamorphism is discounted. features of the gneisses and Scourie Dykes suggest areas of Variations in P(H20) give rise to low Laxfordian strain. variations in tectonic and metam- orphic development. fragments throughout all regions. The Scourie Dykes, consisting of The Scourie Dykes occur as deformed mainly now represented by two suites (cpx plag and noritic The originally varied rock types are Some noritic and ultra- (opx-plag/opx-oliv) rocks), were amphibolites and 'hornblende granulites'. emplaced on NE-sw lines. The latter basic representatives are preserved. A Scourie Dykes in areas of ow are rare and include layered The original trend of the Scourie Laxfordian strain show relict ultrabasio rocks. Dykes in these regions was NE-SW. structural and mineralogical Later metamorphic assemblages are features. Original trend E-W amphibolites of several types and the 'hornblende granulites'. all regions, what little Little of the early complex is Evidence of the early complex is scarce in consisting of preserved metasedimentary and metaigneous seen to be preserved. Probably there is derived from plutonic ealo-alkaline assemblages, now much deformed. the Evidence of the nature of the rocks the gneisses are banded and The South Harris complex is largest area of such reliots, early complex is best seen in incorporate sed' and igneous the areas of low Laxfordian v reliots. They show early containing a great variety of strain. A late Scourian amph- lithologioal variations (cryptic rock types and exhibiting stages ibolite facies metamorphism is geochemical variations) and some of Scourian metamorphism and suggested. evidence of a late Scourian granite Scourian structures. producing event. It is likely that much of the mig- matite complex is of Scourian age.

Table 6.1 Comparative table of tectono-metamorphic events in North Harris, South and, Hest Harris and Lewis. (S and W.Harris after biyers_(1968), Lewis after, Davies, et al (1975))

282 Bibliography

Anderson,A.T.,.Braziunas,T.F., Jacoby,J. and Smith,J.V. 1972 Thermal and metamorphic history of breccias 14306, 14063, 14270 and 14321. Proc.Third Lunar Sci.Conf. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta.Supp1.3 v1,819 Baragar,W.R.A..and Goodwin,A.M 1969 Andesites and Archaean volcanism of the Canadian Shield. In 'Proceedings of the Andesite Conference' Ed.A.R.McBirney Bull.Ore.St.Dep.Geol.Miner.Ind. 65,13 Bhattacharyya,C. 1971 An evaluation of the chemical distinctions between igneous and metamorphic orthopyroxenes. Am.Mineralogist 56,499 Binns,R.A. 1969 Ferromagnesian minerals in high grade metamorphic rocks. Spec.Publ.Geol.Soc.Aust. 2,323 Bowes, D.R. 1967 The petrochemistry of some Lewisian granitic rocks. Mineral.Mag. 36,342 Bowes,D.R. 1971 Original nature of Archaean rocks of north- west Australia. Spec.Publ.Geol.Soc.Aust. 3,77 Burns,D.J. 1966 Chemical and mineralogical changes associated with the Laxfordian metamorphism of dolerite dykes. Geol.Mag. 103,19 C armichael,I.S.A., Turner,F.J. and Verhoogen,J. 1974 Igneous Petrology McGraw Hill

283 •

Cawthorn,R.G. and.Collerson,K.D. 1974 The recalculation of pyroxene end member parameters and the estimation of ferrous and ferric iron content from electron microprobe analyses. Am.Mineralogist 59,1203 Chayes,F. 1970 On deciding whether trend surfaces of progressively higher orders are meaningful]. Geol.Soc.Am.Bull. 81,1273 Collerson,K.D. 1975 Contrasted patterns of K/Rb distribution in Precambrian high grade metamorphic rocks from Central Australia. J.Geol.Soc.Aust. 22,145 Coward,M.P. 1969 The structural and metamorphic geology of South Uist, Outer Hebrides. Ph.D. Thesis, University of London Coward,M.P., Francis,P.J., Graham,R,H., Myers,J.S. and Watson,J. 1969 Remnants of an early metasedimentary assemblage in the Lewisian Complex of the Outer Hebrides. Proc.Geol .Assoc. 80,387 Coward,M.P., Francis,P.J., Graham,R.H. and Watson,J. 1970 Large-scale Laxfordian structures of the Outer Hebrides in relation to those of the Scottish mainland. Tectonophysics 10,1+25 Coward,M.P. 1973 Heterogeneous deformation in the development of the Laxfordian Complex of South Uist, Outer Hebrides. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 129,139 'Davies,F.B., Lisle,R.J. and Watson,J. 1975 The tectonic evolution of the Lewisian Complex in Northern Lewis, Outer Hebrides. Proc.Geol.Assoc. 86,45

284

Davis,J.C. 1973 , Statistics and data analysis in geology. Wiley Dearnley,R. 1962 An outline of the Lewisian Complex of the Outer Hebrides in relation to that of the Scottish Mainland. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 188,143 Dearnley,R. 1963 The Lewisian Complex of South Harris. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 119,243 Dearnley,R and Dunning,F.W. 1968 Metamorphosed and deformed pegmatites and basic dykes in the Lewisian Complex of the Outer Hebrides and their geological significance. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 123,335 Dearnley,R. 1973 Scourie Dykes of the Outer Hebrides. in Park,R.G. and Tarney,J.(Eds.) The Early Precambrian of Scotland and related rocks of Greenland. Univ.of Keele, pp131-136 Deer,W., Howie,R. and Zussman,J. 1963 Rock forming minerals 5 volumes Longmans, London Dickinson,B.B. 1974 The metamorphic evolution of the supracrustal belt, South Harris, with special reference to textural variations. Ph.D. Thesis, University of London Dickinson,B.B., and Watson,J. 1976 Variations in crustal level and geothermal gradient during the evolution of the Lewisian Complex of North-West Scotland. Precambrian Res. 3,363 Dougal,J.W. 1928 Observations on the geology of Lewis, Trans.Edin.Geol.Soc. 12,pt.1 Drury,S.A. 1972 The tectonic evolution of a Lewisian Complex on Coil, , Scotland.

285 Drury,S.A. 19720 The chemistry of some granitic veins from the Lewisian of Coll and Tiree, Argyllshire, Scotland. Chem.Geol. 9,175 Drury,S.A. 1974 Chemical changes during retrogressive metamorphism of Lewisian rocks from Coll and Tiree. Scot,J.Geol. 10,237 Esler,J.E., Smith,P.F. and Davis,J.C. 1968 KWIKR8, a Fortran 4 program for multiple regression and geologic trend surface analysis. Kansas Geol.Surv.Computer Cont. 28 Evans,C.R. 1974 The Lewisian of Lochinver, ; the type area for the Inverian metamorphism. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 130,125 Field,D. and Clough,P.W.L. 1976 K/Rb ratios and metasomatism in metabasites from a Precambrian amphibolite-granulite transition zone. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 132,277 Finger,L.W. 1972 The uncertainty in the calculated ferric iron content of a microprobe analysis. Ann.Rep.Dir.Geophys.Lab., Carnegie Inst. 71,25 Fisher,D.E., Joensu,O. and BostrUm,K. 1969 Elemental abundances in ultramafic rocks and their relation to the upper mantle. J.Geophys.Res. 74,3865 Francis,P.W. 1969 Some aspects of the Lewisian geology of Barra and adjacent small islands. Ph.D. Thesis, University of London Francis,P.W. 1973 Scourian-Laxfordian relationships in the Barra isles. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 129,161

286 s Graham,R.H. 1969, A structural analysis of Lewisian rocks in parts of North Uist and the Sound of Harris, Outer Hebrides. Ph.D. Thesis, University of London Green.D.H. and Ringwood,A. 1967 An experimental investigation of the gabbro to transformation and it's petrological significance. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta. 31,767 Green,D.H. and Ringwood,A.E. 1970 Mineralogy of peridotitic compositions under upper mantle conditions. Phys.Earth.Planet.lnt. 3,359 Green,T.H. 1967 An experimental investigation of sub-solidus assemblages formed at high pressure in high alumina basalt, kyanite eclogite and grosspydite compositions. Cont.Min.Pet. 16,84 Heddle,M.F. 1901 The mineralogy of Scotland. Vol.2 Heier,K.S. 1962 Trace elements in feldspars- a review. Norsk.Geol.Tidd. 42 (feldspar Volume),415 Heier,K.S. and Thoresen,K. 1971 Geochemistry of high grade metamorphic rocks, Lofoten-VesteraRlen, North Norway. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta. 35,89 Hobbs,B., Means,W. and Williams,P. 1976 An outline of structural geology. Wiley Interscience Holland,J.G. and Lambert,R.St.J. 1972 Chemical petrology and K/Ar ages of the Lewisian gneisses on Rona, near Skye, Scotland. Geol.Mag. 109,339 Holland,J.G. and Lambert,R.St.J. 1975 The chemistry and origin of the Lewisian gneisses of the Scottish mainland: the Scourie and Inver assemblages and sub-crustal accretion. Precambrian Res, 2,161

287 Howie,R.A. 1969 Some orthopyroxenes from Scottish metamorphic rocks. Mineral.Mag. 33,903 Howle,R.A. and Smith,J.V. 1966 X-ray emission micro-analysis of rock forming minerals. 5- orthopyroxenes. J.Geol. 74,443 Hutchison,C.S. 1974 Laboratory handbook of Petrographic techniques. Wiley Interscience Irvine,T.N. and Baragar,W.R. 1971 A guide to the chemical classification of the common volcanic rocks. Can.J.Earth Sci. 8,523 Kleeman,A.W. 1965 The origin of granitic magmas. J.Geol.Soc.Aust. 12,35 Kostyuk,E.A, and Sobolev,V.S. 1969 Paragenetic types of calciferous amphiboles of metamorphic rocks. Lithos 2,67 Kretz,R. 1963 Distribution of magnesium and iron between orthopyroxene and calcic pyroxene in natural mineral assemblages. J.Geol. 71,773 Kuno,H. 1966 Lateral variation of basalt magma types across continental margins and island arcs. Bull.Volc. 29,195 Lambert,R.St.J., Chamberlain,V.E. and Holland,J.G. 1970 The geochemistry of Archaean rocks. In Windley,B.F. (ED.) The early history of the Earth, p377 •Lambert,R.St.J. and Holland,J.G. 1972 A geochronological study of the Lewisian from Loch Laxford to , Sutherland, North West Scotland. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 128,3 Larsen,E.S. 1938 Some new variation diagrams for groups of igneous rocks. J.Geol. 46,565 Leake,B.E. 1968 A catalog of analysed calciferous and sub- calciferous amphiboles together with their nomenclature and associated minerals. Geol.Soc.Am.Spec.Paper 98 Lewis,J.D. and Spooner,C.M. 1973 K/Rb ratios in Precambrian granulite terranes. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta. 37,111 Macculoch,J. 1819 A description of the Western Isles of Scotland. 3 volumes, London Miyashiro,A. 1973 Metamorphism and metamorphic belts. George, Allen and Unwin London Moorbath,S., Powell,J.L, and Taylor,P.N. 1975 isotope evidence for the age and origin of the "grey gneiss" complex of the southern Outer Hebrides, Scotland. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 131,213 Moroney,M.J. 1951 Facts from figures. Penguin Books Ltd. Moxham,R.C. 1965 Distriburion of minor elements in coexisting hornblendes and biotites. Can.Mineral. 8,204 Murchison,R. and Geikie,A. 1861 On the altered rocks of the Western Islands of Scotland and the North Western and Central Highlands. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 17 Myers,J. 1968 The tectonic and metamorphic history of the Lewisian migmatite complex of western Harris. Ph.D. Thesis, University of London .Myers,J. 1970 Gneiss types and their significance in the repeatedly deformed and metamorphosed Lewisian Complex of Western Harris, Outer Hebrides. Scot.J.Geol. 7,254 Myers,J. 1971 The late Laxfordian migmatite complex of western Harris, Outer Hebrides.

Scot.J.Geol. 7,234 289 Myers,J. 1971 Zones of abundant Scourie Dyke fragments and their significance in the Lewisian Complex of western Harris, Outer Hebrides: with a note by R.J.Lisle. Proc.Geol.Assoc. 82,365 Mysen,B.O. and Heier,K.S. 1972 Petrogenesis of in high grade metamorphic gneisses, exemplified by the Hareidland eclogite, western Norway. • Cont.Min.Pet. 36,73 Nockolds,S.R. 1954 Average chemical composition of some igneous rocks. Geol.Soc.Am.Būl1. 65,1007 O'Hara,M. 1061 Petrology of the Scourie Dyke, Sutherland. Mineral.Mag. 32,848 Park,R.G. 1973 The Laxfordian belts of the Scottish mainland. In Park,R.G. and Tarney,J.(Eds.) The early Precambrian of Scotland and related rocks of Greenland. Park,R.G. and Cressweil,D. 1972 Basic dykes in the early Precambrian (Lewisian) of North West Scotland: their structural relations, conditions of emplacement and orogenic significance. Int.Geol.Cong. 11,238 ,23 Partridge,E. 1976 Usage and abusage. Penguin Peach,B.N. and Horne,J. 1907 The geological structure of the North West Highlands of Scotland. Memoir Geol.Survey.Scot. Pearce,J.A. and Cann,J.R. 1973 Tectonic setting of basic volcanic rocks determined using trace element analyses. Earth.Planet.Sci.Lett. 19,290 Pearce,T.H. 1968 A contribution to the theory of variation diagrams. Cont.Min.Pet. 19,142

290 s Pearce,T.H. 1969 Some comments on the differentiation of the Dundonald Sill, Ontario. Can.J.Earth.Sci. 6,75 Pearce,T.H. 1970 Chemical variations in the Palisade Sill. J.Pet. 11,15 Pearce,T.H., Gorman,B.E. and Birkett,T.C. 1975 The TiO2-K20-P205 diagram: a method of discriminating between oceanic and non-oceanic basalts. Earth.Planet.Sci.Lett. 24,419 Pidgeon,R.T. and Aftalion,M. 1972 The geochronological significance of discordant U-Pb ages of oval-shaped zircons from a Lewisian gneiss from Harris, Outer Hebrides. Earth.Planet.Sci.Lett. 17,269 Raase,P. 1974 Al and Ti contents of hornblende, indicators of pressure and temperature of regional metamorphism. Cont.Min.Pet. 45,231 Rgheim,A. and Green,D.H. 1974 Experimental determination of the temperature and pressure dependence of the Fe-Mg partition coefficient for coexisting garnet and clinopyroxene Cont.Min.Pet. 48,179 Ramsay,J. 1967 Folding and fracturing of rocks. McGraw-Hill Shaw,D.M. 1968 A review of K-Rb fractionation trends by covariance analysis. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta. 32,573 Sheraton,J.W. 1970 The origin of the Lewisian gneisses of north- west Scotland, with particular reference to the Drumbeg area, Sutherland. Earth.Planet.Sci.Lett. 8,301

291 Sheraton,J.W., Skinner,A.C. and Tarney,J. 1973 The geochemistry of the Scourian gneisses of the Assynt district. In Park,R.G. and Tarney,J. (Eds.) The Early Precambrian of Scotland and related rocks of Greenland, Uni.of Keele p13 Sighinolfi,G.P. 1969 K-Rb ratios in high grade metamorphism: a confirmation of the hypothesis of a continental crust evolution. Cont.Min.Pet. 21,346 Sighinolfi,G.P. 1971 Investigations into deep crustal levels: fractionating effects and geochemical trends related to high grade metamorphism. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta. 35,1005 Skinner,A.C. 1970 Geochemical studies in the Lewisian of north- west Scotland and comparable rocks in east Greenland. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Birmingham Spry,A. 1969 Metamorphic textures Pe rgamnon Sutton,J. and Watson,J.V. 1951 The pre-Torridonian metamorphic history of the Loch Torridon and Scourie areas in the North-West Highlands of Scotland, and it's bearing on the chronological classification of the Lewisian. J.Geol.Soc.Lond. 106,24 Tarney,J., Skinner,A.C. and Sheraton,J.W. 1972 A geochemical comparison of major Archaean gneiss units from Northwest Scotland and east Greenland. 24th I.G.C. Section 1 p162 'Taylor,S.R.. 1964 Abundance of chemical elements in the continental crust: a new table. Geochim.Cosmochim.Acta. 28,1273

292 Thornton,C.P. and Tuttie,O.F. 1960 Chemistry of igneous rocks 1 Differentiation Index. Amer.J.Sci. 258,664 Tuttle,O.F. and Bowen,N.L. 1958 Origin of granite in the light of experimental studies in the system NaA1Si308-KA1Si308- Si02-H20. Geol . Soc . Am. Mem. 74 Waard,D.de 1965 A proposed subdivision of the granulite facies. Amer.J.Sci. 263,455 Watson,J. 1969 The Precambrian gneiss complex of Ness, Lewis, in relation to the effects of Laxfordian regeneration. Scot.J.Geol. 5,269 Watson,J. 1968 Post-Scourian metadolerites in relation to late Laxfordian deformation in Great Bernera, Outer Hebrides. Scot.J.Geol. 4,53 Watterson,J. 1968 Homogeneous deformation of the gneisses of Vesterland, south-west Greenland. GrqSnlands Geol.Unders. Bull. 78 Winchester,J.A. and Floyd,P.A. 1976 Geochemical magma type discrimination: application to altered and metamorphosed basic igneous rocks. Earth.Planet.Sci.Lett. 28,459 Windley,B.F., Herd,R.K. and Bowden,A.A. 1973 The Fiskenaesset Complex, west Greenland. Part 1 A preliminary study of the stratigraphy, petrology and whole rock chemistry from Qegertarssuatsiaq. Gr¢Inlands Geol.Unders. Bull.106

293 Windley,B.F, and Smith,J.V. 1974 The Fiskenaesset Complex, west Greenland. Part 2: General mineral chemistry from Qegertarssuatsiaq. Gronlands Geol.Unders. Bull.108 Witty,G. 1975 The geochemistry of the Roneval anorthosite, South Harris, Scotland. Ph.D. Thesis, University of London Wood,B.J. and Banno,S.B. 1973 Garnet-orthopyroxene and orthopyroxene- clinopyroxene relationships in simple and complex systems. Cont,Min,Pet. 42,109 Wood,B.J. 1974 The solubility of alumina in orthopyroxene. coexisting with garnet. Cont.Min.Pet. 46,1 Wood,B.J. 1975 The influence of pressure, temperature and bulk composition on the appearance of garnet in orthogneiss- an example from South Harris, Scotland. Earth.Planet.Sci.Lett. 26,299 Wood,B.J. 1976 Mixing properties of tschermakitic clinopyroxenes. Am.Mineral. 61,599 Wood,B.J. and Fraser,D.G. 1976 Elementary thermodynamics for geologists. Oxford Uni .Press Wy11ie,P.J. (Ed.) 1967 Ultramafic and related rocks Wiley Yoder,H.S. and Tilley,C.E. 1962 Origin of basalt magmas: an experimental study of natural and synthetic rock systems. J.Pet. 3,342

294 Appendices

'The time has come.... to talk of many things' Lewis Carroll

295 Appendices

3 Appendix A: Whole-rock chemical analysis 296 1)Method of sample preparation 296 2)Analysis 297 3)Detection limits 297 4)Quality of results 298 5)Presentation of results: 299 Sample locality map- gneisses and granites 300 Biotite gneisses: major elements 301 Biotite gneisses : trace elements 302 Hornblende-biotite gneisses/granites: major elements 303 Hornblende-biotite gneisses/granites: trace elements 304 Yttrium, thorium and chromium trace element concentrations in selected gneiss samples 305 Sample locality map- basic and ultrabasic rooks 306 Amphibolites: major elements 307 Noritic and ultrabasio rocks: major elements 308 Trace element concentrations in selected basic and ultrabasic rocks 309 Appendix B: Mineral chemistry 310 Maaruig ultrabasic rocks: samples 183, 167, 182 311 : samples 168, 181, 166 312 South Tarbert ultrabasios: sample 201 313 Noritic rocks: samples 351, 329 314 : samples 41a, 320 315 Scourie Dykes: samples 7, 242 316 : samples 134, 275 317 Eornblende-granulites: samples 5, 272 318

r sample 362 319

•9. Y R Appendix A Whole-rock chemical analysis: techniques and results ll Method of sample preparation While the techniques of sample preparation have since evolved to some extent the method employed at the time the analytical work presented in this thesis was carried out involved the fusing of a crushed sample .to produce a glass bead which was then re-crushed and pressed into a briquette, the aim being to produce as homogeneous a sample as possible and eliminate matrix effects. In outline the procedure was as follows: a. Removal of any weathered portion from the sample b. Splitting of the sample into pieces suitable for the jaw- crusher (some 1" oubes)•. o. Jaw-crushing to 14 # d. Representative sample taken (important in coarse rooks) e. 'Tema' crushing to 400.3- f. Accurate sample weighing g. Oven drying overnight; reweighing to establish H2O+ h. Ignition at 850°C; reweighing to establish H2O+ (volatiles in general would thus be included here) Major element briquettes i. Accurate weighing of sample and lithium tetraborate flux to give a sample:flux ratio of 1:7 j. Tumbling to ensure thorough mixing of flux and sample Ic. Fusion at 1100-1200°C to give a glass bead 1. 'Tema' grinding of the glass to 400k m. Glass powder pressed into a briquette using an alcohol-based binder. Pressure applied: 5-7 tons/cm2 n. Storage and analysis (At all stages from g. onwards the sample should be kept dry by storing in a dessicator. Generally only possible for the finished briquettes)

296 Trace element briquettes i. The above process is repeated until h. when some 5 grams of ignited rock powder is pressed into a briquette (using the binder) with a borax powder backing for further support. No dilution with flux is used.

21 Analysis Standard X—ray florescence methods were employed using a Phillips X—ray fluorescence spectrometer. All samples were analysed for the 'standard' range of major elements, together with the trace elements Sr, Rb, La, Zr, Ni, Ba, Y, Th and Cr in selected samples. The raw data for the major element concentrations were processed using a computer program compiled by Robin Parker (and which involved the correction of data and calculation'bf calibration lines using data provided by analysis of standard samples of known composition analysed both before and after a 'runt). Na and FeO data, obtained by wet—chemical methods (by Pete Watkins) were incorporated during the processing, as were the data on ignition losses. The trace element concentrations were calculated 'by hand' and are uncorrected for matrix effects, absorbtion by other elements and so forth. The methods of calculation varied from element to element but all involved an analysis of a standard sample; the calculations were then simple calculations of backgrounds and ratios with the count— rate given by the standard.

31 Detection limits The following tables give the detection limits for both major and trace element concentralons. All represent (as a percentage) the discrepany between analysed and known element concentrations in the standard samples but those for the major elements were given in the computer output while those of the trace elements were hand— calculated. Major elements

Element Average absolute error (%) Average relative error (%) SiO 2 .414 .71 .004 TiO2 .37 A1203 .279 1.75 Fe203 .031 ..36 Mn0 .003 3.06 Mg0 .260 .65 Ca0 .056 .94 X20 .023 .89 297 Trace elements

Element T Average relative error (%) Ni .53 La 2.46 P 1.85 Be .76 Zr .80 Sr 1.19 Rb .76 Th 4.51 Y .04

IL Quality of results As was intimated in the introduction to the geochemical section of Chapter 3 the quality and reproducibility of. the analytical results for the gneisses was nowhere near as good as had been expected, while those for the basic and ultrabasio were, overall, exoellent. This discrepancy was seen in analyses of briquettes of these rock types produced at the same time and by the same analyst (the author) thus refuting the suggestion of "preparation errors" made at the time by Dr. Borley and others. It would seem, therefore, that the only diff- erence in preparation between the two sets of rocks was in the time they spent in storage. The gneisses were analysed within one or two weeks of preparation while the basic rocks were kept for almost two months while waiting for machine time, being oven—dried (at 120°C) before analysis, suggesting that the poor results of the gneisses were due to water absorbtion by the briquettes during storage. This suggestion is reinforced by the painstaking and detailed study of the problem of water absorbtion in these pressed—glass briquettes undertaken by Robin Parker a study in which it was shown that the standards alone could contain up to 3% of water (by weight) after prolonged storage in the dessicator. The influence of water on analytical results is uncertain but it can be seen that errors of + 3% could yield considerable variation in ones results. In addition Parker compared the presed—glass method to that of Norrish and Hutton in which some additions are made to the flux and the pressed glass bead itself is analysed without crushing. I give below his conclusions to this report (without prior consent) and leave the reader to make his own assesment of the quality of the analytical results given in this thesis.

298 SUMMARY.

A number of major element analytical runs on rock samples, carried out by post-graduate research students using XRF and sample flux-fusion techniques, contained results of unacceptable quality. It was therefore decided to inves- tigate the various factors affecting the analytical data. The analyses in these runs were carried out on ground glass briquettes prepared from pure lithium tetraborate fusions (sample to flux ratio 1 7). The fusion melts were quenched to a glass, and then ground and the powder briquetted. The briquettes were made up with an internal binder (a water/polyvinyl alcohol solution). Drying tests (at 110 - 22ft C) show that the briquettes contain variable concentrations of binder moisture, and a series of analytical tests show that variations in this moisture content is related to significant variations in the measured major element concentrations. The analytical test data also indicates that for S£O2 rich rocks the length of time used to press the briquettes is a further source of variation in the concentrations. Other factors such as variations in the ground glass grain size, the pressing pres- sure used to form the briquettes, the homogeneity of the fusion glass, and the smoothness of the pressing die are discussed along with errors associated with sample and flux weighing, sample pre-ignition, machine drift and dead time, matrix corrections and the errors in the standard calibrations. Tn the light of the test data and the discussions on the various sources of error, a revised briquette preparation procedure is recommended. The main points of this revised procedure are-(1) the use of an external backing instead of an internal binder, (2) increased glass grinding times to reduce grain size variations, (3) the use of a mirror smooth pressing die, and (4) the use of standardized pressing times and pressures in forming the bri- quettes. A precision and accuracy test run is recommended to evaluate the revised briquette preparation procedures. The Norrish and tiutton(1969) method of fusing and analysing rock samples was also evaluated in terms of the various sources of error referred to above. In the Norrish method the fusion melt is cast directly as a glass disc and this eliminates the errors associated with grinding and pressing the fusion glass as in the production of briquettes. The presence of the heavy absorber lanthanum oxide in the Norrish flux also means that matrix effects are less critical as compared to pure lithium tetraborate fusions. Furthermore the preparation time and cost for Norrish discs is shorter and cheaper by com- parison to the briquette method investigated in this report. A test run using the Norrish technique ( including samples prepared by a number of research students) has produced satisfactory results and it is recommended that this method should be made generally available for rock analysis in the department,

(From an internal report on XRF sample preparation in the Geology Dept. of Imperial College; by R.Parker)

Presentation of results In the following pages the whole—rock data (both major and trace elements) are presented as a series of tables, one set for the gveisses and related rock types and a second for the basic and ultrabasio rooks. Both are preceeded by a sample locality map. The arrangement of the tables is given in the contents list at the beginning of the appendices.

In all tables major elements are given as percent oxides and their totals are shown; trace elements are in parts per million (ppm). Total volatile loss is given as loss on ignition (10I).

299 •136 135

3387 1656

•333 •338 ;26 • 332 • 63 .60 •=~ '38 58.. 57 . 34 `37 `263 •664 •43 44 • . 244

261 •

• 53 •45 •15 83 • .264 • 363 '366 •128

129• '127 91. 3i 26 90• • 89 150 • •120

113. 118. 239t t238 •1l4 t117 240 .215 96t '242 '305 ~115 103 • 284•

209 • 286 • 277 • ~133 273 • , 274

205 • i •268 ' , •158 289 358. '290 J 156• 28~f

XRF sample localities.

• Gneisses (FIB and B) + Granitic rocks

See also Fig: 3.21 for sample localities in trend surface analysis.

300 fir

BIOTITE GNEIS: ES: MAJOR ELEMENTS

NO. :IO2 TI02 AL203 FED FE203 MNO MGO CAO NA2D K20 P205 L❑I TOTAL 34 73.69 .32 14.00 1.20 1.47 .03 .71 3.15 3.88 1.21 .34 100.00 37 69.74 .32 14.65 .51 1.80 .03 .71 3.26 4.67 1.53 .13. .35 97.74 43 71.47 .29 15.10 .61 1.76 .03 .71 3. 15 3.88 1.21 .34 100.00 44 67.65 .38 15.69 .95 2.03 .03 .96 3.49 4.51 1.59 .13 .56 97.97 45 67.76 .63 15.77 1.34 1.48 .02 .67 3.13 4.76 2.60 .15 .55 98.86

5:3 68.19 .35 14.65 1.19 1.70 .03 .58 1.69 :3.09 5.30 .57 97.30 57 69.45 .34 15.27 1.37 2.60 .02 .99 3.11 4.64 2.03 .35 98.60 60 70.13 .24 14.70 .87 1.47 .03 .54 2.60 4.35 2.31 .29 97.50 63 68.53 .36 15.21 1.30 1.4=, .05 1.22 3.80 4.31 1.80 .09 .,_ 98.73 73 69.56 .32 15.12 .37 1.74 .06 .89 3.75 4.34 1.23 .13 .79 98.34 74 69.26 .33 15,47 .35 1.73 .03 .89 3.26 4.47 1.63 .13 .39 97.93 83 69.59 .33 15.84 .42 2.35 .04 .38 3.87 4.62 1.28 .19 .73 99.12 90 69.50 .94 16.31 .93 1.12 .02 1.20 3.60 4.40 1.74 .13 .38 100.27 103 67.7n .32 15.41 .73 1.92 .03 .89 :3.61 3.29 1.09 .26 .95.32 114 68.80 .31 15.36 .59 2.11 .03 .74 3.35 4.40 1.37 .09 .44 97.58 120 70.04 .28 14.99 1.67 1.71 .02 .54 2.32 4.31 2.42 .12 .39 99.`21 127 69.71 .26 16.06 .69 .93 .02 .63 3.14 4.61 2.70 .09 .35 )9.19 135 70.18 .35 15.00 .60 1.69 .02 .72 '3.16 4.46 2.06 .05 .27 98.56 140 68.95 .32 15.65 1.63 2.06 .03 .95 3.47 4.27 1.42 .12 .28 99.17 150 69.12 .40 16.32 1.32 1.85 .03 1.10 3.70 4.27 1.65 .10 .23 100.09 248 72.75 .25 14.76 .24 .99 .02 .63 2.77 4.08 2.27 .20 .35 99.31 250 63.34 .77 16.52 2.38 :3.84 .08 1.64 4.41 4.71 1.93 .19 .30 100.11 256 69.15 .36 16.63 .69 1.96 .03 .72 3.65 4.91 1.47 .21 .10 99.88 261 68.30 .43 15.80 2.06 2.18 .03 .84 3.37 4.47 1.48 .15 .33 99.44 264 63.65 .37 15.37 1.20 2.66 .06 2.23 4.35 4.79 1.45 .11 .39 96.63 272 65.54 .39 15.27 .54 2.30 .03 1.04 3.45 4.58 1.50 .61 95.36 286 68.10 .40 14.90 1.53 3.62 .06 1.53 4.39 4.24 1.26 .15 .86 97.97 317 70.57 .28 15.2? 1.23 1.98 .02 .71 3.47 4.52 1.25 .13 .36 99.81 332 70.22 .38 15.28 1.38 2.69 .04 .63 2.47 4.20 2.J0 .18 .54 100.30 333 70.50 .35 15.50 .29 1.88 .03 .87 3.21 4.31 1.72 .13 .42 99.21 338 70.38 .39 15.56 .84 2.14 .03 1.13 3.14 4.00 1.91 .15 .48 100.00 343 65.64 .35 14.68 1.65 1.75 .05 1.13 3.69 3.92 1.72 .16 .84 95.58 363 74.43 .34 12.83 .85 1.44 .07 1.11 3.20 2.99 1.43 .15 .73 99.57

301 BIOTITE GMEICCEC: TRACE ELEMENTS MO. SA RB LA ZR NI BA 37 528.0 76.0 40.0 210.0 14.0 716.0 44 415.0 22.0 36.0 213.0 14.0 t:22.0 45 482.0 92.0 44.0 282.0 16.1 719.0 63 523.0 89.0 31.0 163.0 10.0 678.0 73 624.0 56.0 19.0 185.'' 15'0 516.0 74 443.0 66.0 44.0 165.0 13.0 546.0 83 769.0 58.0 21.0 183.0 14.0 480.0 90 377.0 104.0 23.0 290.0 32. 0 698'0 114 452.0 95.0 22. 0 137.0 10.0 232. 0 120 489.0 93.0 14.0 165.0 11.0 673.0 127 431.0 108.0 13.0 110.0 10.0 38.0 135 433.0 50.0 18.0 187.0 12.5 518.0 140 5?6,0 94.0 81.0 170.0 17.0 526.0 150 361.0 88.0 33.8 173.0 25.0 385.0 233 16.0 143.0 35.0 828.0 248 468.0 65.0 62.0 188.0 41.0 232.0 250 329.0 88.0 62.0 146.0 21.0 587.0 256 372.0 76.0 44.0 151.0 13.0 448.0 261 463.0 91.0 20.0 209.0 15.0 574.0 264 555.0 49.0 27.0 153.0 31.0 724.0 305 256.0 101.0 50.0 135.0 15.0 407.0 316 486.0 41.0 18.0 187.0 12.0 518.0 317 414.0 64.0 41.0 158.0 14.0 549.0 332 298.0 81.0 66.0 175.0 20.0 598.0 333 380.0 80.0 28.0 154.0 18.0 828.0 338 406.0 81.0 52.0 156.0 14.0 790'0 343 370.0 67.0 20.0 130.0 34.0 632.0 363 276.0 76.0 39.0 143.0 10.0 208.0

302 HORNRLENDE-BIOTITE GNEIS:SES: MAJOR ELEMENTS NO. ::IO2 1102 AL203 FED FE203 MNO MGO CAD NAM K20 P205 LOI TOTAL 15 70.64 .33 15.36 1.45 1.81 .04 .79 4.23 4.29 1.34 .12 .96 101.36 68 67.60 .41 14.52 2.86 2.98 .07 1.51 4.13 3.90 1.80 .10 .43 100.31 128 69.39 .32 15.64 .45 1.49 .03 .99 3.52 4.49 1.41 .10' .30 98.13 129 69.35 .37 16.30 .79 1.15 .04 .32 3.93 2.71 2.44 .10 .25 97.75 136 72.81 .16 14.91 .22 .90 .02 .43 3.35 4.62 1.73 .05 .35 99.55 156 70.02 .36 15.50 .48 1.44 .04 .84 3.55 4.24 1.77 .11 .55 98.90 158 63.51 .55 14.60 3.14 5.70 .10 1.87 5.07 3.79 1.57 .12 .55 100.57 153 65.04 .54 15.78 2.57 1.22 .09 1.98 5.01 3.96 1.69 .11 1.06 99.05 233 66.43 .45 16.42 1.39 2.98 .07 1.31 4.74 4.39 1.34 .14 99.52 240 68.14 .40 15.52 .67 2.16 .03 .63 3.50 4.50 1.40 .56 97.40 242 68.45 .40 15.19 1.28 2.81 .08 1.40 4.12 4.00 1.79 .20 .37 100.09 244 70.46 .38 15.92 1.73 2.18 .03 .89 3.52 3.20 1.62 .16 .07 100.16 263 70.51 .23 14.75 .71 1.53 .03 .76 2.69 4.06 2.78 .09 .20 98.34 273 68.41 .26 15.51 .06 1.86 .04 1.06 3.64 4.39 2.28 .11 .63 98.25 274 69.26 .30 15.30 .73 1.34 .04 .95 3.42 4.62 2.46 .10 .61 99.13 284 67.71 .38 16.25 .91 2.63 .0"`_ 1.09 4.63 4.10 1.28 .20 .26 99.49 305 65.41 .60 15.77 .58 2.33 .06 1.73 4.21 4.46 1.72 .16 .43 97.46 316 64.87 .00 15.76 .17 2.88 .09 1.66 4.73 4.11 1.54 .22 .36 96.99 318 68.34 .38 15.80 .04 1.71 .03 .62 3.18 4.09 2.81 .14 .58 97.70 381 68.96 .30 15.00 1.76 1.93 .04 .84 3.79 4.77 1.26 .14 .24 99.03

GRAMITIC ROCKS: MAJOR ELEMENTS

N❑. 102 1102 AL203 FED FE203 MNO MGO CAD NA20 K20 P205 LOI TOTAL 26 74.57 .16 13.67 .64 .81 .01 .18 1.21 3.26 5.07 .04 .48 100.10 96 69.39 .39 15.47 1.91 2.21 .03 .94 3.09 3.78 2.43 .16 .31 100.11 115 72.88 .16 13.67 .64 .81 .01 .18 1.21 3.26 5.07 .04 100.00 116 71.14 .39 14.83 .90 1.89 .02 .51 1.49 4.55 5.56 .57 101.94 126 69.43 .36 15.00 1.88 1.91 .03 .35 2.31 3.98 3.94 .11 .83 100.13 153 73.02 .25 14.17 .79 .62 .02 .29. 1.54 3.56 4.94 .13 .20 999.53 165 71.34 .18 15.37 .93 .74 .03 .77 2.39 3.69 3.87 .09 99.89 9 .40 235 72.94 .23 13.74 .83 1.33 .02 .41 2.43 3.69 2.65 .14 8 101.80 238 72.56 .20 16.40 .26 1.04 .02 .40 2.79 4.39 3.48 .30 99.63 239 68.97 .46 14.87 1.60 1.97 .02 .56 1.62 ..19 5.68 .07 .62 99'65 287 74.90 .13 16.15 .21 .79 .01 .19 2.53 3.87 4.56 .03 .44

303 HSRNE:LENDE-BIOTITE EMEISSES: TRACE ELEMENT' MCD. SR RB LA ZR NI BA 15 228.0 65.0 15.0 1:34.0 42.0 346.0 68 280.0 52.0 21.0 191.0 41.0 433.0 128 45 0. 0 L00.0 23. 0 133.0 26.0 :37.0 129 486.0 101.0 30.0 163.0 10.0 123.0 136 486.0 41.0 18.0 187.0 12.5 271.0 15G 302.0 97.0 53.0 193.0 22.0 434.0 158 220.0 26.0 30.0 145.0 50.0 385.0 163 317.0 77.0 34.0 143.0 16.0 403.0 242 395.0 90.0 27.0 139.0 34.0 363.0 244 264.0 86.0 39.5 157.0 13.0 516.0 263 343.0 89.0 12.0 130.0 14. 0 421.0 273 358.0 67.0 16.0 100.0 28.0 925.0 c?4 369.0 67.0 14.0 163.0 12.0 744.0 284 241.0 67.0 10.0 151.0 19.0 372.0 286 427.0 55.0 24.0 134.0 33.0 601.0 287 401.0 128.0 7.0 103.0 6.0 611.0 318 456.0 97.0 24.0 173.0 10.0 5.0 381 274.0 20..E 39.0 143.0 19.0 441.0.

GRANITIC FQCK.S: TRACE ELEMENTS MO. SR RB LA ZR MI BA 26 248.0 102.0 27.0 148.0 24.0 330.0 96 316.0 121.0 28.0 146.0 21.0 860.0 126 410.0 103.0 38.0 154.0 14.0 243.0 15:3 191.0 126.0 25.0 110-0 13.0 566.0 239 254.0 109.0 18.0 131.0 43.0 408.0

304 Yttrium, thorium and chromium trace element concentrations of selected gneiss samples

Sample Y Th Cr 74 B 9 4 58 120 B 6 6 19 127 B 4 5 98 128 H 6 3 54 135 B 9 9 35 140 B 5 5 56 150 B 4 6 48 156 H 8 6 55. 233 H 2 7 78 244 H 10 10 54 248 B 5 5 85 250 B 11. 8 65 256 B 6 9 83 261 B 5 4 47 263 H_ 4 5 98 264 H 4 5 65 273H 1 5 63 316 H 4 4 55 317E 3 ' 7 52 318 H 8 9 95 333 B 8 9 100 338 B 5 5 63 363 B 8 10 37 381 H 9 4 58

H • hornblende—biotite gneiss B • biotite gneiss

305 .132

329 b 327 59 32 4 0 319• 252• 4251 :.254•

56 • 245 • 249*

*262

• 00

9•

•348 362 .

.121 5 •N

• 243 285* w 0281 37 . 0280 6272 341 0, ' 41 ••w 270• i 352. •292 360• •213 _ ?183 0193 XRF sample localities. '196 • 160 •Amphibolite R Hornblende-granulite O b Noritic rocks 0 ° Ultrabasic rocks

306 AMPH I POL I TES LOI TOTAL NO. :-IO2 TIO2 AL20:3 FED f-E2O:3 MN❑ M6O CFO NAM K2O 9 53.80 .89 13.26 2.57 6.72 .25 5.31 13.80 2.04 .46' '24 99.34 56 49.21 1.47 13.50 5.85 9.48 .23 6.49 10.46 2.88 .47 .31 97.63 80 48.86 1.13 14.16 :3.93 10.56 .22 7.05 10.78 2.46 .59 .31 100.05 39 50.65 1.22 14.59 3.67 11.23 .20 6.05 7.84 3.17 1.38 1.53 98.90 121 50.82 1.24 12.87 4.94 11.32 .24 5.64 9.80 2.75 .81 •34 100.78 132 49.36 .89 13.83 4.33 8.95 .22 7.30 11.17 3.00 .94 .44 99.54 160 49.70 1.95 13.33 4.03 13.04 .23 6.12 9.58 2.32 .77 .07 100.99 177 49. 75 2.69 14. 54 5.77 9.-a:6 .18 5.48 1 0. 04 .60 .80 1.20 99.41 249 45.91 2.64 13.16 6.77 12.25 .27 5.92 10.68 3.18 .82 101.60 213 43.88 1.71 16.20 3.94 10.15 .21 5.04 10.74 2.65 .34 .56 100.46 243 43.77 .89 13.72 5.24 8.93 .23 6.16 11.24 :3.51 .41 .23 99.13 245 47.98 .99 13.94 3.77 10.00 .23 6.73 11.71 2.73 .28 .35 98.27 353 9. 26 1.73 13.73 3.05 13.04 .23 5.22 8.97 2.99 .88 99.10 368 60.30 1.18 10.98 5.07 11.19 .12 4.27 1.80 2.31 3.98 101.20 270 50.22 1.48 13.63 4.36 10.71 .22 5.51 9.20 2.97 1.02 .13 99.44 272 50.12 1.54 14.07 3.46 11.46 .21 6.13 10.23 2.44 .23 99.73 280 49.57 .94 14.06 3.48 9.99 .21 7.02 11.11 2.35 .25 .23 99.21 281 53.49 .70 14.37 2.93 7.21 .18 6.32 8.81 3.60 1.01 .57 99.45 285 49.26 1.77 12.54 3.88 12.90 .23 5.40 10.11 2.73 .47 .17 99.21 292 49.28 1.72 12.80 4.89 11.74 .25 5.64 10.15 2.90 .76 100.36 308 46.99 1.71 12.73 5.33 11.32 .25 5.30 10.32 2.90 1.09 .41 97.85 341 47.69 1.22 12.28 5.58 11.26 .25 6.44 10.25 2.44 .93 .62 95.80 343 46.35 1.16 14.25 3.70 11.'~3 .20 6.93 10.18 3.01 .86 .29 99.92 352 47.59 2.16 12.45 4.09 13.69 .24 5.31 8.12 2.80 1.19 .66 98.30 360 57.78 .75 14.97 1.56 12.47 .07 3.11 3.11 2.71 2.69 .31. 99.54. 362 50.05 1.10 14.63 4.07 10.06 .24 6.95 10.94 2.41 .55 .07 99.72 382 49.70 1.10 14.63 4.07 10.06 .24 6.95 10.94 2.41 .55 100.65 5 50.02 1.29 13.58 3.39 10.10 .20 6.77 10.50 2.03 .25 .94 98.89 37 50.75 1.36 13.79 3.94 9.81 .20' 7.01 10.65 3.00 .21 .25 99.46 40 50.21 1.35 13.53 3.93 9.81 .20 6.73 10.72 3.00 .18 99.66 41 50.67 1.35 13.57 3.65 10.?.n .20 6.65 10.79 3.09 .17 100.12

307 0

NORITIC ROCKS: AR.DV❑URLIE CRO NA2O K.20 LOI TOTAL N❑. 5102 TIO2 AL2O3 FED FE2O3 MN❑ MGO 329 50.53 .37 10.79 2.39 8.37 .17 15.60 8.42 1.68 .33 .73 99.37 327 51.48 .35 12.13 1.97 7.65 .16 15.22 9.71 1.84 .25 .24 101.05 324 46.69. .24 9.30 3.74 10.34 .18 17.71 8.78 4.58 .16 .25 101.57 259 50.25 .38 12.22 1.89 7.78 .16 14.41 9.35 1.64 .28 98,43 AMPHIBOLITES FROM MARGIN 319 50.68 1.31 13.74 3.64 11.26 .23 6.01 9.80 2.62 .89 100.23 254 50.00 1.36 13.62 3.75 11.24 .22 5.82 9.46 3.01 .60 .09 98.98 252 49.71 1.65 12.96 3.75 12.61 .23 5.19 9.08 2.84 .67 .24 98.45 251 50.80 1.28 13.45 3.69 11.01 .22 6.11 9.85 3.18 .52 101.49 249 45.91 2.64 13.16 6.77 12.25 .27 5.92 10.68 3.18 .82

MAARUI6 ULTRABASIC ROCKS ' 168 44.07 .25 4.19 4.43 8.48 .17 33.97 3.34 .76 .32 .24 100.23 170 41.72 .17 3.07 3.23 9.81 .17 36.38 2.77 .80 .14 .23 98.49 182 42.50 .18 3.34 3.75 9.11 .17 37.50 2.73 .61 .14 1(10.03 181 44.55 .17 2.74 2.87 8.91 .16 33.30 4.90 .61 .13 .23 98.57 183 44.62 .23 4.48 2.86 9.59 .16 33.40 3.00 .55 .45 .67 100.01

ULTPABASIC ROCKS: SOUTH OF TARBERT ' 185 52.92 .24 3.66 1.83 8.28 .19 24.37 6.00 .67 .15 .03 98.34 193 48.68 .30 6.61 2.66 9.43 .21 19.80 9.99 .64 .05 .20 98.57 196 49.88 2.85 13.22 5.19 9.79 .19 7.34 9.84 .69 1.40 .27 100.66

308 Trace element concentrations in selected basic and ultrabasio rocks

phibolites Sample Sr Rb Ni Cr Zr Ba P 80 147 23 93 166 62 145 290 39 189 9 375 112 65 131 595 152 176 1292 281 297 19 119 105 102 160 833 341 128 11 87 2250 73 185 1168 352 160 31 133 109 108 261 1726 177 281 18 97 168 134 216 1841 5 154 11 95 80 123 1145 37 184 9 375 112 . 65 131 595

Noritic rocks 329 160 16 529 42 434 ' 327 179 12 287 1525 49 101 405 324 256 14 73 2160 137 593 300

Maaruig ultrabasics 167 ' 59 6 1593 5853 21 71 221 168 66 15 1365 5044 32 112 275 169 65 9 1593 5853 21 71 236 170 47 10 1037 6965 31 67 269 173 818 7029 19 69 242 181 59 6 1570 4 79 205 183 75 29 1449 6282 100 383

Tarbert ultrabasics 185 31 9 564 3340 18 54 165 196 143 10 994 1285 17 65 238 L All figures in ppm.

309 Appendix B Mineral chemistry Polished thin sections, carbon coated, were used in both the Imperial College tGeoscan' and Cambridge solid state electron micro- probe microanalysers (see introduction to Chapter 5). The data obtained from the Cambridge instrument were so good that they have been used almost exclusively in this thesis. A single standard (the 'Cobalt Standard') allows the analysis of up to twelve elements in any sample while further standards were available if desired. The analytical instrument is linked directly to a small computer which produced oxide concentrations and mineralogical formulae for each analysis as work proceeded. I am indebted to Dr. Long and Norman Charnley (particularly the latter) for their assistance in using this machine. Further details of micro—probe procedure are irrelevant here. The tables presented below represent some 300 individual analyses of mineral species in some of the more important basic and ultrabasio rocks of the region. The mineral chemistry of these rooks is presented in Chapters 4 and 5, overall averages being given in the latter for each mineral type. The few mineral analyses from the gneisses are given in Chapter 3. In the tables the data are shown as percent oxides and mineral formulae are given based on the number of oxygen atoms in the unit cell suggested by Deer et al (1973). The following abbreviations are employed: orthopyroxene (opx), olinopyroxene (opx), olivine (ol), garnet (gnt), feldspar (flap), amphibole (ampli), opaque (opq) and biotite (biot). The number in parentheses at the head of each column indicates the number of individual analyses used in the average analysis given in that column.

310 Opx(4) 01 (4) F1sp(3) Opx(3) 01 (2) Opq(2) Opx(3) 01 (2) Opq(2) AmpI(2) Si02 54.77 39.85 54.8o 56.44 40.57 .49 57.08 40.82 .70 45.38 TiO2 .04 .11 ) .14 .77 A1203 2.46 27.86 .51 21.80 .46 22.75 11.61 •Fe0 9.23 15.14 .19 9.02 13.63 31.49 7.93 11.31 - 29.25 4.36 MnO .04 .14 .15 .10 .31 .16 .12 .37 30.26 44.99 1.66 32.54 45.85 5.98 33.57 47.14 7.26 18.10 Ca0 1.58 6.33 .32 .14 12.06 Na20 6.56 1.78 K20 .14 .36 Cr205 .79 .07 .39 37.50 39.14 1.41 Total 99.16 100.12 97.61 99.36 100.16 97.69 99.35 99.38 99.60 95.83 Si 1.94 .999 9.98 1.98 1.01 .02 1.99 1.01, .02 6.82 Ti .001 .003 .003 .09 Al .10 5.98 .02 .84 .02 .85 2.06 Fe .27 .28 .19 .27 .28 .87 .23 .24 .88 .55 Mn .001 .003 .004 .002 .009 .005 .003 .01 1.60 Mg 1.68 .45 1.70 1.70 .29 1.74 1.74 .35 4.06 Ca .06 1.24 .01 .01 1.94 Na 2.32 .52 .03 .07 Cr .02 .01 .01 .97 .99 .17 Tot 3.997 3.001 20.196 4.001 2.992 3.000 3.997 2.991 3.000 16.270 183 167 182 3 Opx(3) 01 (2) Opq(2) 01 (4) Opx(4) Opq(2) Amph(2) - 01 (2) Amph (7) 0pq(2)

Si02 56.90 40.58 .46 40.57 57.26 .72 49.10 40.60 45.72 .46 ta

A1203 .77 19.48 11.24 7,80 11.25 21,92 1; E3 CD TiO2 .94 .37 .80 .19 Co SUg

Fe0 9.46 15.29 31.52 15,21 9.29 41.44 4.72 13.13 4.53 31.78 0 ot r00

Mh0 .17 .22 .44 .11 .54 .12 .04 .36 os 31.64 44.94 6.03 45.82 32.49 4.55 19.62 46.53 18.20 6.78 v s

CaO 1.14 .26 12.65 11.64 w ON 0,

Na20 1.48 2.28 aup

K20 .35 .30 z i Cr205 .46 41.34 .20 41.26 1.11 1.22 37.89 a

W au w

Total 100.54 101.026 99.26 101.60 99.6o 100.69 97.22 100.38 95.99 99.37 0 ei 0

Si 1.98 1.01 .02 1.00 2.01 .02 7.27 ',1.01 6.41 .02 S44 CD X 0 Al .75 .45 1.36 .83 1.86 0 .03 z Ti .02 .04 .01 .09 et Fe .28 .32 .86 .31 .27 1.17 .59 .27 .53 .85 Mn .01 .02 .01 .003 .02 .005 .01 Mg 1.64 1.66 .29 1.69 1.70 ' .23 4.32 1.72 3.80 .33 Ca .04 .01 2.00 1.75 Na .42 .62 K .07 .05 Cr .02 1.07 .006 1.10 .13 .13 .96 Tot 3.994 2.988 3.00 2.999 3.992 3.00 16.195 2.995 3.00 15.247 168 181 166 tltrabasic rocks: mineral chemistry (cont.) Sample 201: Ultrabasic lens south of Tarbert

Opx(4) 01 (4) Opq(3) Amph(2) 3102 55.21 39.80 1.20 46.71 A1203 2.09 56.76 12.03 Ti02 .38 FeO 12.73 20.19 24.25 6.98 MnO .25 .23 .11 MgO 29.53 41.54 13j'19 17.42 CaO .18 11.65 Nat 1.91 1(20 Cr205 6.17 .16 Total 99,98 101.76 101.57 97.35 Si 1.96 1.00 .03 6.93 Al .09 1.78 2.11 Ti .04 Fe .37 .43 .53 .87 Mn .007 .005 .02 M 1.57 1.56 •52 3.85. Ca .006 1.85 Na .55 Cr .13 .02 Tot 3.998 2.99E 3.00 1F.235

313 1

()plc(?) Gnt(?) Flsp(6) Opq(2) Opx(5) Amph(2) Flsp(2) Flsp(2) Biot(3) N

o

Si02 54.71 40.92 54.56 .58 54.29 42.56 56.11 53.47 37.89 rit lan U - A1203 2.02 23.16 29.08 1.65 14.88 28.76 30.43 16.09 i c se rock TiO2 54.77 1.83 4.83 FeO 16.31 19.67 .27 43.93 15.82 9.38 9.28 5C I. s ( u

MnO .27 .895 .- - .44 .102 u p A rd

Mg0 25.31 9.03 .06 2.55 26.36 13.57 17.20 5 vourli CaO 2.26 6.35 11.31 1.63 11.81 10.63 12.87 .12 6z Na20 4.71 1.89 5.29 3.72 e) X20. .075 1.29 9.56 : Cr205 .145 .40 .075 mi n er

Total 101.02 100.10 99.98 102.27 100.15 97.28 100.79 100.49 94.97 al

ch Si 1096 1098 10.71 .014 1.96 6.48 9.998 9.604 6.02 emi Al .085 2.04 7.28 .07 2.67 6.04 6.45 3.01 st

Ti . .993 .21 .58 r y Fe .489 1.23 .099 .886 .476 1.19 1.23 Mn .008 .057 .009 . 003 . .01 Mg 1.35 - 1.01 .053 .092 1.41 3.08 4.07 Ca .09 .51 2.81 .063 1.93 2.03 2.46 .58 Na . .56 1.83 1.30 x . .007 .251 1.94 Cr .004

Tot 3.992 7.919 22.359 1.993 3.996 16.376 19.896 19.809 16.867 351 329 Noritic rocks (Ardvourlie), mineral chemistry (cont.) Samples 41a and 320

Opx(4) Flsp(3) Amph(3) Cpx(5) Gnt(4) Flsp(2) Amph(3)

Si.02. 54.90 53.63 47.30 51.59 38.82 59.81 42.32 A1203 1.20 29.997 10.46 1.42 21.64 25.90 11.60 TiO2 .88 2.10 Fe0 16.65 7.03 15.81 30.11 .22 21.06 Mn0 .38 .58 .11 1.42 Mg0 26.58 16.15 9.56 2.73 6.91 Ca0 .61 12.12 12.24 21.18 7.21 '7.72. 11.20 Na20 4.13 1.40 - .32 7.12 1.31 K 20 .72 086 1.33 Cr2.05 .10 .87 .064 Total 100.42 99.88 97.62 100.00 101.93 100.85 97.90 Si 1.98 9.68 7.08 1.98 3.02 10.58 6.76 Al .05 6.38 1.85 .06 1.99 5.40 2.18 Ti .098 .26 Fe .5o .88 .505 1.96 .032 2.79 Mn .012 .007 .004 .094 Mg 1.43 3.60 .55 .32 1.64 Ca .024 2.34 ' 1.96 .87 .601 1.46 1.93 Na 1.45 .407 .024 2.44 .402 K .14 .27 Cr .003 .103 .012 Tot 3.996 19.85 16.120 3.992 7.984 19.944 16.233

41a 320 .; a ..

315 Opx(1) Cpx(4) Gnt(4) Flsp(4) Amph(4) Cpx(7) Flsp(4) Amph(4) OP4(2) a Si02 51.42 52.19 37.05 56.81 rF o 42.05 51.77 59.89 42.44 .87 w A1203 1.03 1.54 21.97 28.59 12.57 1.72 26.30 11.58 ® aD TiO2 .113 1.996 .072 1.61 -4 51 Fe0 31.88 CD 13.48 28,39 .22 20,25 11.54 .07 18.30 97.30 a. un Mn0 • .33 .11 1.008 .57 .412 .31 P a Mg0 15.68 w 10.95 3.75 7.52 11.46 8.66 CD CaO .74 22.03 8.16 10.59 11.50 22.55 7.38 11.41 Na20 toi3 5.49 1.36 .28 7.49 .89 K20 x 0 .081 1.20 1.50 o w Cr205 w CA m Total 101.09 100.41 100.34 101.82 99.02 99.81 100.13 95.19 98.16 Si 1.98 1.98 3.01 10.04 6.64 1.96 10.56 6.78 .034 Al .047 .07 1.997 5.96 2.48 .o8 5.47 2.18 Ti .003 .24 .002 .307 Fe 1.03 .43 1.82 .03 2.68 .36 .001 2.44 2.97 Mn .011 .003 .07 .01 .013 Mg .90 .62 .44 1.77 .65 2.06 Ca .03 .89 .65 2.01 1.96 .91 1.39 Na 1.95 1.88 .42 .02 2.56 .28 K .02 .24 .31 Cr Tot 3.996 3.988 7.988 19.93 16.41 3,993 19,983 16,035 3.00 7 242 0cra Cpx(2) Opx(4) Cnt(4) Opq(2) Flsp(2) Amph(4) Cpx(5) Opx(2) Gnt(2) Opq(2) Flsp(2) Amph(2)1 0 . Si02 5.05 1.05 .31 5.37 1.52 w A1203 1.30 .89 21,84 2804 11.44 2.10 .83 22.09 28.16 11.44 4-4x TiO2 50,45 1.49 .16 50.46 1.88 FeO 12.76 32.16 29914 48.12 .27 18.83 12.29 32.14 28.87 47.66 .119 20.55 a w Mn0 .12 .41 1.00 .29 .17 .43 1.27 .34 Mg0 10.94 15.25 3.54 .24 8.57 10.88 15.02 3.71 7.81 CaO 22.27 .54 6.93 9.87 11.27 22.12 .60 6.84 9.64 11.05 a Na20 505' 1.05 .31 5.37 1.52 t+~ X20 .76 .97 rt Cr205 0 0 Total 98,69 100.32 101.14 99,52 99.28 95.69 100.12 100.36 , 102.01 99.12 100.25 98.61 Si 1.98 1.99 3.02 .011 10.11 6.84 1.97 1.995 ‘ 3.03 .02 10.16 6.70 Al .06 .04 2.01 5.97 2.15 .09 .04 2.01 5.92 2.28 Ti .96 .18 .004 .97 .22 Fe .41 1.05 1.90 1.11 .041 2.52 .39 1.04 1.86 1.01 .018 2.71 Mn .004 .01 .07 .006 .005 .014 .08 .007 Mg .63 .88 .41 .009 2.04+ .61 .87 .43 1.83 Ca .92 .02 .58 1.91 1.93 .90 .03 .56 1,84 1.86 Na • 1.77 .33 .02 1,86 .47 .15 .19 Cr Tot 3.995 3.993 7.980 1.999 19.790 16.14o 3.986 3.986 7.966 2.00 19.804 16.267- 134 275 Y (1D Total Teo Cr205 Ca0 K20 Na20 TiO2 MgO Mn0 Si02 Tot A1203 Cr Na Ti Ca Fe Mg Mn Si Al 100.86 Cpx(3) 2.2.34 11.19 12.19 52.18 3.989 1.97 1.69 .02 .904 .63 .008 .08 .003 .21 .38 .12 • 25 ' 101.06 Opx(8) 15.66 31.51 51.9? 3.985 1.01 1.996 .02 .90 .019 .001 .04 .57 .57 .02 .82 101.80 Gnt(5) 29.20 38.92 21.94 7.983 1.89 2.00 3.02 7.00 3.6o 1.15 .58 .42 .076 5

100.03 Opq(3) 51.1? 47.22 2,00 .028 .99 .96 .02 .001 .75 . .86 07 Flsp(3) 99,14 10.06 55.94 28.51 19,789 1.76 1,92 6.05 9.99 4.70 16.047 Amph(3) 97,71 11.43 17.59 12.08 44.05 1.91 2.07 2.29 6.87 2.22 1.13 8.91 1.84 .13 .34 .22 .67 • Cpx(9) 99.74 11.10 21.76 12.81 51.98 3. 1.97 1.83 .006 .89 . .002 .003 .08 • .08 .10 .o8 6 9 40 84 3 100.00 Opx(6) 15.73 31.05 51.46 3.9 1 1.996 .91 .023 .014 . .04 .55 .43 .78 00 8 6

102.15 Gnt(2) '3.02 29.75 39.04 21.81 7.984 1.93 1.99 7.08 3.36 1.13 .59 .39 .074 27 2 Opq(2) 99.35 52.03 45.61 1.992 .022 .008 .96 .99 .02 .59 .37 .76 100.13 Flsp(2) 19.828 10.13 55.79 28.78 1.74 1.95 9,999 6.08 5.00 .06 .43 16.136 Amph(2) 96.81 11.28 18.41 11.86 43.08 1.91 1.97 6.82 2.44 2.21 8.34 1.40 1.78 .43 .21 .66 v VI 3 tfa uavrinuu.z2 :Xa;c]wauo T ~dUFW ar Hornblende-granulites: mineral chemistry Sample 362

Cpx(8) Opx(8) Ont(4) opq(4) Flsp(2) Amph(3) Si02 51.90 51,61 38.77 .83 54.01 43.54 A1203 1.88 .94 21.75 .23 30.03 11.69 TiO2 .09 50.66 1.81 FeO 12.17 31.00 30.90 48.65 .30 17.96 Mn0 .15 .57 1.49 .36 Mg0 . 11.35 15.95 2.26 9.17 CaO 22.05 .56 7.09,' 12.22 11.68 Na20 .092 4.56 1.35 K20 .008 .802 Cr205 .051 Total 99.60 100.73 102.26 100.72 101.06 98.06 Si 1.97 1.99 3.02 .021 9.66 6.81 Al .08 .04 1.997 .007 6.34 2.15 Ti .002 .95 - .2.1 Fe .39 .999 2.009 1.02 .035 2.35 Mn .005 .019 .098 .007 Mg .64 .92 .26 2.14 Ca .896 .023 .59 2.34 1.96 Na .007 1.58 .1+1 Cr .064 Tot 3.986 3.994 7.982 2.00 19.959 16.245

319